WO2023201489A1 - Communication method, terminal device, and network device - Google Patents

Communication method, terminal device, and network device Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2023201489A1
WO2023201489A1 PCT/CN2022/087497 CN2022087497W WO2023201489A1 WO 2023201489 A1 WO2023201489 A1 WO 2023201489A1 CN 2022087497 W CN2022087497 W CN 2022087497W WO 2023201489 A1 WO2023201489 A1 WO 2023201489A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
state
bwp
indication information
status
frequency domain
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/CN2022/087497
Other languages
French (fr)
Chinese (zh)
Inventor
张晋瑜
胡荣贻
王淑坤
Original Assignee
Oppo广东移动通信有限公司
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by Oppo广东移动通信有限公司 filed Critical Oppo广东移动通信有限公司
Priority to PCT/CN2022/087497 priority Critical patent/WO2023201489A1/en
Publication of WO2023201489A1 publication Critical patent/WO2023201489A1/en

Links

Images

Classifications

    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W24/00Supervisory, monitoring or testing arrangements
    • H04W24/02Arrangements for optimising operational condition

Definitions

  • the present application relates to the field of communication, and more specifically, to a communication method, terminal equipment and network equipment.
  • BWP Bandwidth Part
  • SSB synchronization Signal Block
  • MG Measurement Gap
  • Embodiments of the present application provide a communication method, terminal equipment, and network equipment that can determine the status of an MG when the terminal equipment switches to a specific BWP, such as an initial downlink BWP or a dormant BWP.
  • a specific BWP such as an initial downlink BWP or a dormant BWP.
  • the embodiment of the present application provides a communication method, including:
  • the state of the measurement interval MG is determined, and the state of the MG is an activated state or a deactivated state.
  • the embodiment of the present application provides a communication method, including:
  • the network device determines the state of the measurement interval MG when the terminal device switches to the initial downlink DL bandwidth segment BWP, and the state of the MG is an activated state or a deactivated state.
  • the embodiment of the present application provides a communication method, including:
  • the state of the measurement interval MG is determined, and the state of the MG is an activated state or a deactivated state.
  • the embodiment of the present application provides a communication method, including:
  • the network device determines the state of the measurement interval MG in the case where the terminal device switches to the dormant bandwidth segment BWP, and the state of the MG is an activated state or a deactivated state.
  • An embodiment of the present application provides a terminal device, including:
  • the first determination unit is configured to determine the state of the measurement interval MG when switching to the initial downlink DL bandwidth segment BWP, and the state of the MG is an activated state or a deactivated state.
  • This embodiment of the present application provides a network device, including:
  • the second determination unit is configured to determine the state of the measurement interval MG when the terminal device switches to the initial downlink DL bandwidth segment BWP, and the state of the MG is an activated state or a deactivated state.
  • the third determination unit is configured to determine the state of the measurement interval MG when switching to the dormant bandwidth segment BWP, and the state of the MG is an activated state or a deactivated state.
  • This embodiment of the present application provides a network device, including:
  • the fourth determination unit is used to determine the state of the measurement interval MG when the terminal device switches to the dormant bandwidth segment BWP, and the state of the MG is an activated state or a deactivated state.
  • An embodiment of the present application provides a terminal device, including a processor, a memory, and a transceiver.
  • the memory is used to store computer programs, and the processor is used to control the transceiver to communicate with other devices.
  • the processor is also used to call and run the computer program stored in the memory, so that the terminal device executes the above application to the terminal device. side communication method.
  • An embodiment of the present application provides a network device, including a processor, a memory, and a transceiver.
  • the memory is used to store computer programs, and the processor is used to control the transceiver to communicate with other devices.
  • the processor is also used to call and run the computer programs stored in the memory, so that the network device performs the above-mentioned application to the network. Device side communication method.
  • Embodiments of the present application provide a chip that is used to implement the above communication method applied to the terminal device side; or to implement the above communication method applied to the network device side.
  • the chip includes: a processor, used to call and run a computer program from the memory, so that the device installed with the chip executes the above-mentioned communication method applied to the terminal device side; or, used to implement the above-mentioned communication method applied to the network Communication method on the device side.
  • Embodiments of the present application provide a computer-readable storage medium for storing a computer program.
  • the device When the computer program is run by a device, the device performs the above-mentioned communication method applied to the terminal device side; or, performs the above-mentioned communication method applied to the network. Communication method on the device side.
  • Embodiments of the present application provide a computer program product, including computer program instructions, which cause the computer to execute the above communication method applied to the terminal device side; or to execute the above communication method applied to the network device side.
  • the status of the MG can be determined when the terminal device switches to a specific BWP, such as the initial downlink BWP or the dormant BWP.
  • Figure 1 is a schematic diagram of an application scenario according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • Figure 2 is a schematic diagram of a BWP switching scenario according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • Figure 3 is a schematic flowchart 1 of a communication method according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • Figure 4 is a schematic flowchart 2 of a communication method according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • Figure 5 is a schematic flow chart 3 of a communication method according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • Figure 6 is a schematic flow chart 4 of a communication method according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • Figure 7 is a schematic block diagram 1 of a terminal device according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • Figure 8 is a schematic block diagram 1 of a network device according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • Figure 9 is a second schematic block diagram of a terminal device according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • Figure 10 is a second schematic block diagram of a network device according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • Figure 11 is a schematic block diagram of a communication device according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • Figure 12 is a schematic block diagram of a chip according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • Figure 13 is a schematic block diagram of a communication system according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • GSM Global System of Mobile communication
  • CDMA Code Division Multiple Access
  • WCDMA broadband code division multiple access
  • GPRS General Packet Radio Service
  • LTE Long Term Evolution
  • LTE-A Advanced long term evolution
  • NR New Radio
  • NTN Non-Terrestrial Networks
  • UMTS Universal Mobile Telecommunication System
  • WLAN Wireless Local Area Networks
  • WiFi wireless fidelity
  • 5G fifth-generation communication
  • the communication system in the embodiment of the present application can be applied to a carrier aggregation (Carrier Aggregation, CA) scenario, a dual connectivity (Dual Connectivity, DC) scenario, or an independent ( Standalone, SA) network deployment scenario.
  • Carrier Aggregation, CA Carrier Aggregation, CA
  • DC Dual Connectivity
  • SA Standalone
  • the communication system in the embodiment of the present application can be applied to unlicensed spectrum, where the unlicensed spectrum can also be considered as shared spectrum; or, the communication system in the embodiment of the present application can also be applied to Licensed spectrum, where licensed spectrum can also be considered as unshared spectrum.
  • the embodiments of this application describe various embodiments in combination with network equipment and terminal equipment.
  • the terminal equipment may also be called user equipment (User Equipment, UE), access terminal, user unit, user station, mobile station, mobile station, remote station, remote terminal, mobile device, user terminal, terminal, wireless communication equipment, user agent or user device, etc.
  • User Equipment User Equipment
  • the terminal device can be a station (ST) in the WLAN, a cellular phone, a cordless phone, a Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) phone, a wireless local loop (Wireless Local Loop, WLL) station, or a personal digital processing unit.
  • ST station
  • SIP Session Initiation Protocol
  • WLL Wireless Local Loop
  • PDA Personal Digital Assistant
  • the terminal device can be deployed on land, including indoor or outdoor, handheld, wearable or vehicle-mounted; it can also be deployed on water (such as ships, etc.); it can also be deployed in the air (such as aircraft, balloons and satellites). superior).
  • the terminal device may also be a wearable device.
  • Wearable devices can also be called wearable smart devices. It is a general term for applying wearable technology to intelligently design daily wear and develop wearable devices, such as glasses, gloves, watches, clothing and shoes, etc.
  • a wearable device is a portable device that is worn directly on the body or integrated into the user's clothing or accessories. Wearable devices are not just hardware devices, but also achieve powerful functions through software support, data interaction, and cloud interaction.
  • wearable smart devices include full-featured, large-sized devices that can achieve complete or partial functions without relying on smartphones, such as smart watches or smart glasses, and those that only focus on a certain type of application function and need to cooperate with other devices such as smartphones.
  • the network device may be a device used to communicate with mobile devices.
  • the network device may be an access point (Access Point, AP) in WLAN, or a base station (Base Transceiver Station, BTS) in GSM or CDMA.
  • BTS Base Transceiver Station
  • it can be a base station (NodeB, NB) in WCDMA, or an evolutionary base station (Evolutional Node B, eNB or eNodeB) in LTE, or a relay station or access point, or a vehicle-mounted device, a wearable device, and an NR network network equipment (gNB) or network equipment in the future evolved PLMN network or network equipment in the NTN network, etc.
  • AP Access Point
  • BTS Base Transceiver Station
  • NodeB, NB base station
  • Evolutional Node B, eNB or eNodeB evolution base station
  • gNB NR network network equipment
  • the network device may have mobile characteristics, for example, the network device may be a mobile device.
  • the network device can be a satellite or balloon station.
  • the satellite can be a low earth orbit (LEO) satellite, a medium earth orbit (MEO) satellite, a geosynchronous orbit (geostationary earth orbit, GEO) satellite, a high elliptical orbit (High Elliptical Orbit, HEO) satellite ) satellite, etc.
  • the network device may also be a base station installed on land, water, etc.
  • Figure 1 illustrates a communication system 100.
  • the communication system includes a network device 110 and two terminal devices 120.
  • the communication system 100 may include multiple network devices 110 , and the coverage of each network device 110 may include other numbers of terminal devices 120 , which is not limited in this embodiment of the present application.
  • network equipment may include access network equipment and core network equipment. That is, the wireless communication system also includes multiple core networks used to communicate with access network equipment.
  • the access network equipment can be a long-term evolution (long-term evolution, LTE) system, a next-generation (mobile communication system) (next radio, NR) system or authorized auxiliary access long-term evolution (LAA- Evolutionary base station (evolutional node B, abbreviated as eNB or e-NodeB) macro base station, micro base station (also known as "small base station"), pico base station, access point (access point, AP), Transmission point (TP) or new generation base station (new generation Node B, gNodeB), etc.
  • LTE long-term evolution
  • NR next-generation
  • LAA- Evolutionary base station evolutional node B, abbreviated as eNB or e-NodeB
  • eNB next-generation
  • NR next-generation
  • LAA- Evolutionary base station evolutional node B, abbre
  • correlate can mean that there is a direct correspondence or indirect correspondence between the two, it can also mean that there is an associated relationship between the two, or it can mean indicating and being instructed, configuration and being. Configuration and other relationships.
  • pre-MG pre-configured measurement gap
  • the frequency domain range of SSB is not within the frequency domain range of BWP2, that is, the SSB is not included in the BWP2 activated by the UE.
  • the MG is required, that is, it can be performed within the MG. Measurement of SSB.
  • timer timer
  • DCI Downlink Control Information
  • SSB take measurement of SSB as an example. Whether it is same-frequency measurement or inter-frequency measurement, when measuring SSB, one of the judgment conditions for whether an MG is required is: whether the frequency domain range of the SSB is within the frequency domain range of the BWP currently activated by the UE; therefore, with the BWP switching , the demand for MG for SSB measurement will also change.
  • pre-MG can also be used for inter-frequency CSI-RS measurement and PRS measurement, but pre-MG needs to be always active and cannot dynamically change with BWP switching.
  • the network device can choose to configure a common MG (that is, the MG involved in Rel-16), or configure the pre-MG to always be active.
  • the configuration and release of MG in related protocols need to be completed through Radio Resource Control (RRC) signaling, and the delay is relatively large. Therefore, in order to allow the configuration of the MG to be adaptively adjusted with the switching of the BWP, the MG is enhanced, that is, the pre-MG is introduced. In this way, it is convenient to consider the mechanism of activating/deactivating the pre-MG with the switching of the BWP.
  • RRC Radio Resource Control
  • a pre-MG is pre-configured for each UE, that is, per-UE, or a pre-MG is pre-configured for each frequency range (Frequency Range, FR), that is, per-FR, and BWP Switching changes the status of the corresponding pre-MG, such as activation status or deactivation status.
  • FR Frequency Range
  • BWP Switching changes the status of the corresponding pre-MG, such as activation status or deactivation status.
  • bandwidth segment Bitwidth Part, BWP
  • the core of BWP is to define an access bandwidth smaller than the cell system bandwidth and terminal bandwidth capabilities.
  • the terminal's sending and receiving operations are all performed within this BWP, thereby achieving more flexible, more efficient, and lower energy consumption terminal operations.
  • the BWP configuration adopts the two-layer signaling mechanism of "RRC configuration + DCI/timer activation".
  • RRC configuration + DCI/timer activation.
  • SIB System Information Block
  • Paging paging
  • initial BWP For the primary cell (PCell), in view of the situation that BWP cannot be configured through RRC signaling before RRC is established, the concept of initial BWP (initial BWP) is added.
  • One method is to determine the bandwidth of a set of data resources indicated in the master system module (Master Information Block, MIB), such as CORESET#0, as the initial downlink BWP (initial DL BWP).
  • Another method is to separately configure an initial DL BWP through the SIB1 information in the SIB message. This is mainly due to the fact that related technologies find that a larger BWP than the bandwidth of CORESET#0 (up to 96RB) is required in some scenarios.
  • UE will fall back to initial DL BWP.
  • the default BWP is one of the BWPs configured by the network device for the terminal device. If there is no explicit instruction, the initial BWP will be used as the default BWP.
  • one of the BWPs can be configured as a dormant BWP (dormant BWP).
  • Physical Downlink Control Channel (PDCCH) detection is not configured on the dormant BWP.
  • the secondary cell that is, the carrier
  • the dormant BWP Physical Downlink Control Channel
  • the UE needs to perform some RRM measurements and Channel Quality Indication (CQI) measurements in the dormant carrier state for data scheduling after carrier wake-up.
  • CQI Channel Quality Indication
  • the UE side determines the status of the MG as follows:
  • FIG 3 is a schematic flowchart 1 of a communication method according to an embodiment of the present application. This method can optionally be applied to the system shown in Figure 1, but is not limited thereto. The method includes at least part of the following.
  • the initial DL BWP is the BWP corresponding to PCell, that is, the network device is configured for PCell.
  • the terminal device only needs to confirm the MG when it successfully switches to the initial DL BWP (in this example, the timing of successfully switching to the initial DL BWP is called the successful switching timing). status.
  • the timing of confirming the status of the MG (in this example, referred to as the status determination timing, for example, when the terminal device switches to the initial DL BWP, or at any time after the terminal device switches to the initial DL BWP), is different from the configuration of the MG. (This configuration can be performed on the terminal device side, or on the network device side, and there is no restriction on the specific configuration end here) and the timing (in this example, the timing of completing the configuration of the MG status is simply referred to as the configuration completion timing).
  • the terminal device needs to confirm the MG status.
  • the terminal device needs to wait for the configuration of the MG status. In this way, after the configuration is completed, the terminal device then confirms the MG's status. state.
  • Scenario 1 The configuration completion time is earlier than the successful switching time. At this time, since the successful switching time is earlier than the status confirmation time, the configuration completion time must also be earlier than the status confirmation time.
  • Scenario 2 The configuration completion time is the same as the successful switching time, both of which are earlier than the status confirmation time.
  • Scenario 3 The configuration completion time is later than the successful switching time, but earlier than the status confirmation time.
  • Scenario 4 The configuration completion time is later than the status confirmation time. In this case, it must also be later than the successful switching time. In this case, the terminal device may need to wait for the MG status configuration to be completed before determining the measurement interval MG status.
  • the terminal device can use the following two methods to determine the status of the MG, specifically including:
  • the terminal device independently determines the status of the MG
  • the first determination method default or protocol stipulation; the state of the MG is the terminal device's default or protocol stipulation. For example, the terminal device defaults the state of the MG to the activated state, or the terminal device defaults the state of the MG to the deactivated state. For another example, the terminal device determines that the state of the MG is an activated state or a deactivated state based on protocol regulations. This method is simple and requires no additional signaling instructions.
  • the network device and the terminal device need to agree in advance.
  • the terminal device and the network device both default to the MG status as activated. status, or, the default MG status is deactivated.
  • the status of the MG determined by the terminal device and the network device based on the protocol is the same, for example, both are in an activated state or a deactivated state.
  • the second determination method judgment mechanism; specifically includes:
  • the status of the MG is determined based on the frequency domain relationship between the measurement object and the target carrier; further, the status of the MG is determined based on the frequency domain relationship to determine whether an MG is needed; for example, the status of the MG
  • it is an activated state When it is determined that an MG is required based on the frequency domain relationship, it is an activated state.
  • the state of the MG is a deactivated state.
  • this example is in a BWP handover scenario, so the UE capabilities and network indication information have been confirmed. Based on this, when the UE capabilities and/or network indication information are determined, the status of the MG is determined based on measurements. The frequency domain relationship between the object and the target carrier is determined.
  • SSB intra-frequency measurement does not require an MG: the UE indicates through signaling that intra-frequency measurement does not require an MG (that is, the UE supports no-gap capability) ; SSB is within the active BWP; the current active BWP is the initial BWP.
  • SSB co-frequency measurement if the UE supports no-gap capability and the network indication information confirms that the UE uses no-gap capability, then SSB co-frequency measurement does not require an MG. At this time, the status of the MG That is, it is a deactivated state, and there is no need to determine based on the frequency domain relationship between the measurement object and the target carrier. Otherwise, if the UE does not support no-gap capability, the status of the MG needs to be determined based on the frequency domain relationship between the measurement object and the target carrier.
  • SSB inter-frequency measurement does not require MG when all the following conditions are met: UE supports inter-frequency measurement without MG; the network indicates that inter-frequency measurement is not applicable to MG; SSB activates BWP within.
  • the SSB inter-frequency measurement does not require an MG.
  • the state of the MG is deactivated. Activation status. If the UE does not support inter-frequency measurement and does not require the MG capability, at this time, SSB inter-frequency measurement must require the MG, and the state of the MG is the active state and does not need to be determined based on the frequency domain relationship between the measurement object and the target carrier. . In other cases, it needs to be determined based on the frequency domain relationship between the measurement object and the target carrier.
  • the terminal device can also determine the status of the MG based on the frequency domain relationship between the measurement object and the target carrier; further, the terminal device can determine the status of the MG based on the frequency domain relationship between the measurement object and the target carrier.
  • the frequency domain relationship determines whether an MG is needed, and then determines the state of the MG based on whether the MG is needed. For example, when the terminal device determines that an MG is needed based on the frequency domain relationship, it determines that the state of the MG is an active state; When the terminal device determines that the MG is not needed based on the frequency domain relationship, it determines that the state of the MG is a deactivated state.
  • the target carrier is a carrier configured by the network device for the terminal device, for example, it is at least part of the carriers configured by the network device for the terminal device. In a specific example, the target carriers are all carriers configured by the network device for the terminal device.
  • the frequency domain relationship between the measurement object and the target carrier may be specifically at least one of the following relationships:
  • the first frequency domain relationship the frequency domain relationship between the frequency domain range corresponding to the measurement object and the frequency domain range of the target carrier.
  • the target carrier is a deactivated carrier or a dormant carrier
  • the frequency domain range of the target carrier refers to the entire frequency domain range of the target carrier.
  • the second frequency domain relationship the frequency domain relationship between the frequency domain range corresponding to the measurement object and the frequency domain range corresponding to the activated BWP in the target carrier.
  • the third frequency domain relationship the frequency domain relationship between the frequency domain range corresponding to the measurement object and the frequency domain range corresponding to any one or more BWPs configured in the target carrier.
  • the target carrier is a dormant carrier.
  • the frequency domain range corresponding to the target carrier can be: the frequency domain range of the target carrier itself (that is, the entire frequency domain range of the target carrier), or the frequency domain range corresponding to the activated BWP in the target carrier, or the target carrier
  • any of the above possibilities are referred to below in terms of the frequency domain range corresponding to the target carrier.
  • the terminal device when the frequency domain range corresponding to the measurement object is within the frequency domain range corresponding to the target carrier, the MG is not required; at this time, the terminal device can determine that the state of the MG is a deactivated state. Otherwise, when the frequency domain range corresponding to the measurement object is not within the frequency domain range corresponding to the target carrier, an MG is required; at this time, the terminal device can determine that the state of the MG is an active state.
  • the frequency domain range corresponding to the measurement object is at least one frequency domain range corresponding to the target carrier, such as the frequency domain range of the target carrier, or the frequency domain range corresponding to the activated BWP in the target carrier, etc.
  • the frequency domain range corresponding to the measurement object is not within all the frequency domain ranges corresponding to the target carrier, for example, it is not within the frequency domain range of the target carrier, and it is not within the frequency domain range corresponding to the activation of BWP in the target carrier, etc., then confirmation is required.
  • MG is at least one frequency domain range corresponding to the target carrier, such as the frequency domain range of the target carrier, or the frequency domain range corresponding to the activated BWP in the target carrier, etc.
  • the network device configures three measurement objects for the terminal device, and each measurement object corresponds to a certain frequency domain range; the network device configures 4 carriers for the terminal device, for example, all 4 carriers are target carriers; or, Three of the four carriers, for example, carrier 1 to carrier 3, are target carriers, and the frequency domain where carrier 4 is located is far away from the frequency domain where the measurement object is located, so they are not used as target carriers.
  • This example does not impose specific restrictions on this; as follows Take 4 carriers as target carriers as an example to illustrate; only when the frequency domain range of all measurement objects is within the frequency domain range corresponding to the target carrier (any one of the 4 carriers is enough), can the measurement object be deemed to correspond to The frequency domain range is within the frequency domain range corresponding to the target carrier; otherwise, if the frequency domain range of one or more measurement objects is not within the frequency domain range corresponding to the target carrier, it means that the frequency domain range corresponding to the measurement object is not Within the frequency domain range corresponding to the target carrier.
  • the frequency domain range of measurement object 1 is within the frequency domain range corresponding to target carrier 1, and the frequency domain ranges of measurement objects 2 and 3 are both within the frequency domain range corresponding to target carrier 2.
  • the measurement object corresponds to The frequency domain range is within the frequency domain range corresponding to the target carrier.
  • the frequency domain ranges of measurement objects 2 and 3 are both within the frequency domain range of target carrier 2, but measurement object 1 is not within the frequency domain range corresponding to any of the target carriers from target carrier 1 to target carrier 4 of the network equipment.
  • it is considered that the frequency domain range of the measurement object is not within the frequency domain range corresponding to the target carrier.
  • the status of the MG is determined based on status indication information; wherein the status indication information is used to indicate that the status of the MG is an activated state or a deactivated state; specifically, the status indication information is used to indicate that the terminal device When switching to the initial DL BWP, the state of the MG is the activated state or the deactivated state.
  • the terminal device receives the status indication information from the network device.
  • the terminal device only needs to confirm the status of the MG when it successfully switches to the initial DL BWP.
  • the timing of confirming the status of the MG, the timing of receiving the status indication information (referred to as the receiving timing in this example), and the timing of successfully parsing the status indication information and obtaining the status of the MG (referred to as the parsing timing in this example) may be as follows. Several situations:
  • the reception timing is later than the successful switching timing; in this case, the terminal device receives the status indication information only after successfully switching to the initial DL BWP, and then parses the status indication information to determine the status of the MG.
  • the reception timing is earlier than the successful switching timing; in this case, there may be a situation where the parsing timing is earlier than the status confirmation timing.
  • the terminal device first receives the status indication information and parses the status indication information, Obtain the status of the MG.
  • the terminal device has not yet successfully switched to the initial DL BWP. Therefore, the terminal device can temporarily store the parsed status of the MG, and then determine the status of the MG after successfully switching to the initial DL BWP. .
  • the status indication information is carried by a system message.
  • the system message also includes: configuration information of the initial DL BWP. That is to say, the status indication information may be carried by a system message containing the configuration information of the initial DL BWP.
  • the status indication information is carried by the SIB message in the system message.
  • the SIB message may also include SIB1, SIB2, SIB3, etc.
  • the status indication information may be carried by any one of SIB1, SIB2, and SIB3 in the SIB message.
  • the status indication information may be carried by the SIB1; further, the SIB1 also includes configuration information of the initial DL BWP. That is to say, while the network device configures the initial DL BWP in SIB1, it can also configure activation (ON)/deactivation (OFF) indication information (that is, status indication information).
  • the ON/OFF indication information is used to indicate When the terminal device switches to the initial DL BWP, the state of the MG is the activated state or the deactivated state. In this way, by modifying the information of SIB1, the initial DL BWP and the ON/OFF indication information of the MG can be associated simply and effectively.
  • the status indication information is carried by the MIB message in the system message.
  • the MIB message implicitly carries (for example, carried by CORESET#0 in the MIB message) the configuration information of the initial DL BWP. . That is to say, while the network device configures the initial DL BWP in the MIB message, it can also configure ON/OFF indication information (that is, status indication information).
  • ON/OFF indication information is used to indicate when the terminal device switches to the desired state. In the case of the initial DL BWP, the state of the MG is the activated state or the deactivated state. In this way, by modifying the MIB message, the initial DL BWP and the MG's ON/OFF indication information can be associated simply and effectively.
  • the UE has not yet established an RRC connection with the network device, and has not completed MG (or pre-MG) related capability reporting and measurement object (Measuring Object, MO) configuration. Based on this, the network device needs to consider the configured ON/OFF indication information when configuring the corresponding measurement object.
  • the status indication information is carried by RRC signaling. That is to say, ON/OFF indication information (that is, status indication information) is configured through RRC signaling.
  • the RRC signaling also includes BWP configuration information.
  • the ON/OFF indication information is placed in the BWP configuration information. That is, the network device configures the BWP configuration information in the RRC signaling and at the same time configures the corresponding ON/OFF indication information, the ON/OFF indication information is used to indicate that the state of the MG is an activated state or a deactivated state when the terminal device switches to the initial DL BWP.
  • the status indication information is carried by serving cell configuration (servingCellconfig) information in the RRC signaling.
  • servingCellconfig serving cell configuration
  • the RRC signaling also includes BWP configuration information; for example, the ON/OFF indication information is placed in the newly added information (or field) in the servingCellconfig information.
  • the network device while configuring the BWP configuration information in the servingCellconfig information, the network device adds an initial downlink BWP preconfiguration interval pattern (preGapStatueForInitialDownlinkBWP) field to configure the ON/OFF indication information corresponding to the initial downlink BWP.
  • preGapStatueForInitialDownlinkBWP the format of the preGapStatueForInitialDownlinkBWP field is as follows:
  • ON means that the state of the MG is the activated state when the terminal device switches to the initial DL BWP; OFF means that the state of the MG is the deactivated state when the terminal device switches to the initial DL BWP. .
  • preGapStatueForInitialDownlinkBWP is only an indication of the status indication information corresponding to the initial downlink BWP.
  • this field can be in other formats, such as OFF by default, or network configuration is required only when ON, such as:
  • a set of sequences is used to indicate the status of MGs corresponding to multiple BWPs.
  • One of the statuses of the MGs corresponding to multiple BWPs corresponds to the initial downlink BWP, such as:
  • preGapStatueForDownlinkBWP SEQUENCE(SIZE(1..numOfBwp))OF OnOffIndicator.
  • the serving cell configuration information may also include at least one of the following fields:
  • Downlink BWP release list (downlinkBWP-ToReleaseList);
  • BWP deactivation timer (bwp-InactivityTimer);
  • the status indication information corresponding to the initial downlink BWP can be included in the serving cell configuration information, servingCellconfig information, or other cell-level configuration information; further, servingCellconfig can include the above BWP configuration information, or for In RRC signaling, the configuration information of BWP is the same level of information.
  • servingCellconfig can include the above BWP configuration information, or for In RRC signaling, the configuration information of BWP is the same level of information.
  • the status indication information is carried by RRC signaling. That is to say, ON/OFF indication information (that is, status indication information) is configured through RRC signaling.
  • the ON/OFF indication information can be specifically represented by the bits in the bitmap corresponding to the carrier.
  • the bitmap corresponding to the carrier is carried in the RRC signaling.
  • the RRC signaling can also Carrying BWP configuration information, the solution of this application does not limit other information carried by RRC. Only the RRC signaling carries the bitmap corresponding to the carrier, and the bits in the Bitmap can represent ON/OFF indication information, both of which are included in this application. within the scope of the program.
  • the ON/OFF indication information is represented by the bits in the Bitmap corresponding to the carrier
  • a new bit can be added to the Bitmap corresponding to the carrier, that is, there is a bit in the bitmap corresponding to the carrier to represent the ON/OFF of the initial DL BWP.
  • the bits in the remaining bits are used to indicate the relevant information of the DL BWP corresponding to the bit in other DL BWPs corresponding to the carrier, for example, indicating the activation status or activation status of the MG of the DL BWP corresponding to the bit.
  • the length of the Bitmap corresponding to the carrier is N+1, where the first bit in the Bitmap indicates the initial The status of the MG corresponding to the DL BWP. For example, when the first bit is 0, the indication is OFF, and when the first bit is 1, the indication is ON; and the remaining N bits are used to indicate the DL BWP corresponding to the carrier. This bit corresponds to the MG status of the DL BWP. It can be understood that the above is only a specific example. In actual applications, the bits representing the ON/OFF indication information can also be other bits in the Bitmap, and the solution of this application is not limited to this.
  • the UE is configured with one MG, or the UE is configured with (or corresponds to) one MG. If the UE is configured with (or corresponds to) two or more MGs, refer to the following example.
  • the status indication information is carried by RRC signaling, and the status indication information is used to indicate that the status of the MG is the deactivation status when the terminal device switches to the initial DL BWP. Further, the status indication information is carried by the deactivated MG list corresponding to the initial DL BWP in the RRC signaling, that is, the deactivated MG list records the MGs when the terminal device switches to the initial DL BWP.
  • Unique identification ID
  • the deactivated MG list corresponding to the initial DL BWP carries the unique identifier of the MG, it can be confirmed that when the UE switches to the initial DL BWP, the status of the MG corresponding to the unique identifier is deactivated.
  • Activated state while other MGs preconfigured for the UE, that is, other MG IDs are not in the deactivated MG list corresponding to the initial DL BWP, the status of other MGs defaults to the activated state or is stipulated by the protocol.
  • the network device configures two MGs for the UE, and the unique identifiers are MG1 and MG2 respectively; the UE receives the RRC signaling and parses it to obtain MG1 in the deactivated MG list corresponding to the initial DL BWP. At this time, It can be confirmed that when the UE switches to the initial DL BWP, the state of the MG corresponding to MG1 is the deactivated state, and the state of the MG corresponding to MG2 is the default activated state.
  • the RRC signaling also includes servingCellconfig information, and the status indication information is carried by the servingCellconfig information. That is, the deactivated MG list corresponding to the initial DL BWP can also be in the servingCellconfig information.
  • the network device adds a deactivated MG list (deactivatedMeasGapListForInitialDownlinkBWP) field corresponding to the initial DL BWP in the servingCellconfig information to indicate which MGs need to be deactivated when the UE switches to the initial DL BWP.
  • the format of the deactivatedMeasGapListForInitialDownlinkBWP field is as follows:
  • deactivatedMeasGapListForInitialDownlinkBWP SEQUENCE(SIZE(1,maxNorfGapId-r17))of MeasGapId-r17,OPTIONAL.
  • the RRC signaling also includes the configuration information of the BWP.
  • the status indication information is in the configuration information of the BWP, that is, the deactivated MG list corresponding to the initial DL BWP can also be in the BWP. configuration information.
  • the status indication information is not in the configuration information of the BWP.
  • the RRC signaling includes servingCellconfig information
  • the servingCellconfig information includes the configuration information of the BWP.
  • the status indication information is in the configuration information of the BWP, that is, the deactivated MG corresponding to the initial DL BWP.
  • the list is in the configuration information of the BWP. That is to say, the servingCellconfig information of the RRC signaling is configured with BWP configuration information, and the BWP configuration information is configured with a deactivated MG list corresponding to the initial DL BWP.
  • the BWP configuration information may not be included in the servingCellconfig information.
  • the servingCellconfig information and the BWP configuration information are information at the same level, etc. This application solution does not limit this.
  • the configuration information of the MG can be outside the deactivated MG list, and the deactivated MG list only records the unique identifier of the MG associated with the BWP (for example, the initial DL BWP). At this time, as long as it can pass The unique identifier of the MG can uniquely locate the configuration information of the MG.
  • the way in which the UE determines the status of the MG by default or based on protocol regulations can be used in combination with the way in which the network device configures the status of the MG.
  • the configuration of the network device is mainly used to determine the status of the MG. For example, in an example, when the terminal device switches to the initial DL BWP, the state of the MG is activated by default or based on protocol regulations.
  • the UE can determine that the status of the MG corresponding to the initial DL BWP is the deactivated state when the terminal device switches to the initial DL BWP. Otherwise, if the network device does not configure the deactivated MG list corresponding to the initial DL BWP, then the status of the MG is the activated state when the terminal device switches to the initial DL BWP.
  • the solution on the network device side is as follows:
  • Figure 4 is a schematic flowchart 2 of a communication method according to an embodiment of the present application. This method can optionally be applied to the system shown in Figure 1, but is not limited thereto. The method includes at least part of the following.
  • the network device determines the state of the measurement interval MG when the terminal device switches to the initial downlink DL bandwidth segment BWP, and the state of the MG is an activated state or a deactivated state.
  • the initial DL BWP is the BWP corresponding to PCell, that is, the network device is configured for PCell.
  • the MG is a preconfigured measurement interval pre-MG; the pre-MG is obtained by enhancing the MG.
  • the state of the pre-MG (such as activation state or deactivation state) will change with BWP switching.
  • the MG may also be a Network control small gap (NCSG) configured through RRC signaling, etc.
  • NSG Network control small gap
  • the solution provided by this embodiment is particularly suitable for the scenario where the MG is a pre-MG. That is, S410 is specifically: the network device determines the state of the pre-MG when the terminal device switches to the initial DL BWP, and the state of the pre-MG is an activated state or a deactivated state.
  • timings there are several timings, namely: the timing when the network device determines the status of the MG (this example is called the network confirmation timing), the timing when the network device configures the status of the MG (this example is called the network configuration timing), and the terminal
  • the timing of the device switching to the initial DL BWP this example is called the timing of successful switching; based on this, the following situations exist:
  • the network configuration timing is earlier than the network confirmation timing; in this case, the successful switching timing may be earlier than the network configuration timing, or the successful switching timing may be later than the network confirmation timing, or the successful switching timing may be between the network configuration timing and the network confirmation timing.
  • the network device can use the following two methods to determine the status of the MG, specifically including:
  • Method 1 for the network equipment side of the initial DL BWP solution Network equipment and terminal equipment agree on the confirmation method;
  • the network device and the terminal device need to agree in advance.
  • the terminal device and the network device both default to the MG status as activated. status, or, the default MG status is deactivated.
  • the status of the MG determined by the terminal device and the network device based on the protocol is the same, for example, both are in an activated state or a deactivated state.
  • the second confirmation method judgment mechanism; specifically includes:
  • this example is in a BWP handover scenario, so the UE capabilities and network indication information have been confirmed. Based on this, when the UE capabilities and/or network indication information are determined, the status of the MG is determined based on measurements. The frequency domain relationship between the object and the target carrier is determined.
  • SSB intra-frequency measurement does not require an MG: the UE indicates through signaling that intra-frequency measurement does not require an MG (that is, the UE supports no-gap capability) ; SSB is within the active BWP; the current active BWP is the initial BWP.
  • SSB co-frequency measurement if the UE supports no-gap capability and the network indication information confirms that the UE uses no-gap capability, then SSB co-frequency measurement does not require an MG. At this time, the status of the MG That is, it is a deactivated state, and there is no need to determine based on the frequency domain relationship between the measurement object and the target carrier. Otherwise, if the UE does not support no-gap capability, the status of the MG needs to be determined based on the frequency domain relationship between the measurement object and the target carrier.
  • SSB inter-frequency measurement does not require MG when all the following conditions are met: UE supports inter-frequency measurement without MG; the network indicates that inter-frequency measurement is not applicable to MG; SSB activates BWP within.
  • the SSB inter-frequency measurement does not require an MG.
  • the state of the MG is deactivated. Activation status. If the UE does not support inter-frequency measurement and does not require the MG capability, at this time, SSB inter-frequency measurement must require the MG, and the state of the MG is the active state and does not need to be determined based on the frequency domain relationship between the measurement object and the target carrier. . In other cases, it needs to be determined based on the frequency domain relationship between the measurement object and the target carrier.
  • the target carrier is a carrier configured by the network device for the terminal device, for example, it is at least part of the carriers configured by the network device for the terminal device. In a specific example, the target carriers are all carriers configured by the network device for the terminal device.
  • the first frequency domain relationship the frequency domain relationship between the frequency domain range corresponding to the measurement object and the frequency domain range of the target carrier.
  • the target carrier is a deactivated carrier or a dormant carrier
  • the frequency domain range of the target carrier refers to the entire frequency domain range of the target carrier.
  • the second frequency domain relationship the frequency domain relationship between the frequency domain range corresponding to the measurement object and the frequency domain range corresponding to the activated BWP in the target carrier.
  • the third frequency domain relationship the frequency domain relationship between the frequency domain range corresponding to the measurement object and the frequency domain range corresponding to any one or more BWPs configured in the target carrier.
  • the target carrier is a dormant carrier.
  • the terminal device when the frequency domain range corresponding to the measurement object is within the frequency domain range corresponding to the target carrier, the MG is not required; at this time, the terminal device can determine that the state of the pre-MG is the deactivated state. . Otherwise, when the frequency domain range corresponding to the measurement object is not within the frequency domain range corresponding to the target carrier, an MG is required; at this time, the terminal device can determine that the state of the pre-MG is an active state.
  • the specific method of determining whether an MG is required may refer to the above description on the terminal device side, and will not be described again here.
  • the frequency domain range corresponding to the measurement object is at least one frequency domain range corresponding to the target carrier, such as the frequency domain range of the target carrier, or the frequency domain range corresponding to the activated BWP in the target carrier, etc.
  • the frequency domain range corresponding to the measurement object is not within all the frequency domain ranges corresponding to the target carrier, for example, it is not within the frequency domain range of the target carrier, and it is not within the frequency domain range corresponding to the activation of BWP in the target carrier, etc., then confirmation is required.
  • MG For specific examples, reference may be made to the above-mentioned examples on the UE side, which will not be described again here.
  • the state of the pre-MG can also be determined based on the frequency domain relationship to determine whether the MG is needed; for example, the state of the pre-MG is based on The state of the pre-MG is an activated state when it is determined that an MG is required based on the frequency domain relationship, and the state of the pre-MG is a deactivated state when it is determined that an MG is not required based on the frequency domain relationship.
  • the state of the pre-MG is an activated state when it is determined that an MG is required based on the frequency domain relationship
  • the state of the pre-MG is a deactivated state when it is determined that an MG is not required based on the frequency domain relationship.
  • Method 2 for the network device side of the initial DL BWP solution the network device controls the status of the MG.
  • the network device sends status indication information, where the status indication information is used to indicate that the status of the MG is an activation state or a deactivation state; specifically, the status indication information is used to indicate that the terminal device switches to the In the case of initial DL BWP, the state of the MG is activated or deactivated.
  • the network device sends status indication information. That is, the timing of sending the status indication information is later than the timing of the network confirming the status of the MG.
  • the status indication information is carried by a system message.
  • the system message also includes: configuration information of the initial DL BWP. That is to say, the status indication information may be carried by a system message containing the configuration information of the initial DL BWP.
  • the status indication information is carried by the SIB message in the system message.
  • the SIB message may also include SIB1, SIB2, SIB3, etc.
  • the status indication information may be carried by any one of SIB1, SIB2, and SIB3 in the SIB message.
  • the status indication information can be carried by the SIB1; further, the SIB1 also includes the configuration information of the initial DL BWP. That is to say, while the network device configures the initial DL BWP in SIB1, it can also configure activation (ON)/deactivation (OFF) indication information (that is, status indication information).
  • the ON/OFF indication information is used to indicate When the terminal device switches to the initial DL BWP, the state of the MG is the activated state or the deactivated state. In this way, by modifying the information of SIB1, the initial DL BWP and the ON/OFF indication information of the MG can be associated simply and effectively.
  • the status indication information is carried by the MIB message in the system message.
  • the MIB message implicitly carries (for example, carried by CORESET#0 in the MIB message) the configuration information of the initial DL BWP. . That is to say, while the network device configures the initial DL BWP in the MIB message, it can also configure ON/OFF indication information (that is, status indication information).
  • ON/OFF indication information is used to indicate when the terminal device switches to the desired state. In the case of the initial DL BWP, the state of the MG is the activated state or the deactivated state. In this way, by modifying the MIB message, the initial DL BWP and the MG's ON/OFF indication information can be associated simply and effectively.
  • the UE has not yet established an RRC connection with the network device, and has not completed MG (or pre-MG) related capability reporting and measurement object (Measuring Object, MO) configuration. Based on this, the network device needs to consider the configured ON/OFF indication information when configuring the corresponding measurement object.
  • the status indication information is carried by RRC signaling. That is to say, ON/OFF indication information (that is, status indication information) is configured through RRC signaling.
  • the RRC signaling also includes BWP configuration information.
  • the ON/OFF indication information is placed in the BWP configuration information. That is, the network device configures the BWP configuration information in the RRC signaling and at the same time configures the corresponding ON/OFF indication information, the ON/OFF indication information is used to indicate that the state of the MG is an activated state or a deactivated state when the terminal device switches to the initial DL BWP.
  • the status indication information is carried by serving cell configuration (servingCellconfig) information in the RRC signaling.
  • servingCellconfig serving cell configuration
  • the RRC signaling also includes BWP configuration information; for example, the ON/OFF indication information is placed in the newly added information (or field) in the servingCellconfig information.
  • the network device while configuring the BWP configuration information in the servingCellconfig information, the network device also adds a preGapStatueForInitialDownlinkBWP field to configure ON/OFF indication information.
  • a preGapStatueForInitialDownlinkBWP field is as follows:
  • ON means that the state of the MG is the activated state when the terminal device switches to the initial DL BWP; OFF means that the state of the MG is the deactivated state when the terminal device switches to the initial DL BWP. .
  • preGapStatueForInitialDownlinkBWP is only an indication of the status indication information corresponding to the initial downlink BWP.
  • this field can be in other formats, such as OFF by default, or network configuration is required only when ON, such as:
  • preGapStatueForInitialDownlinkBWP ON optional;
  • a set of sequences is used to indicate the status of MGs corresponding to multiple BWPs, and one of the statuses (such as the first one) of the MGs corresponding to multiple BWPs corresponds to the initial downlink BWP, such as:
  • preGapStatueForDownlinkBWP SEQUENCE(SIZE(1..numOfBwp))OF OnOffIndicator.
  • the serving cell configuration information may also include at least one of the following fields:
  • Downlink BWP release list (downlinkBWP-ToReleaseList);
  • BWP deactivation timer (bwp-InactivityTimer);
  • the status indication information corresponding to the initial downlink BWP can be included in the serving cell configuration information, or other cell-level configuration information; further, the servingCellconfig information can include the above BWP configuration information, or In the RRC signaling, the configuration information of the BWP is the same level of information.
  • the solution of this application does not limit this. As long as the RRC signaling at the cell level carries the status indication information corresponding to the initial downlink BWP, it is within the protection scope of the solution of this application. There is no exhaustive list here.
  • the status indication information is carried by RRC signaling. That is to say, ON/OFF indication information (that is, status indication information) is configured through RRC signaling.
  • the ON/OFF indication information can be specifically represented by the bits in the bitmap corresponding to the carrier.
  • the bitmap corresponding to the carrier is carried in the RRC signaling.
  • the RRC signaling can also Carrying BWP configuration information, the solution of this application does not limit other information carried by RRC. Only the RRC signaling carries the bitmap corresponding to the carrier, and the bits in the Bitmap can represent ON/OFF indication information, both of which are included in this application. within the scope of the program.
  • the ON/OFF indication information is represented by the bits in the Bitmap corresponding to the carrier
  • a new bit can be added to the Bitmap corresponding to the carrier, that is, there is a bit in the bitmap corresponding to the carrier to represent the ON/OFF of the initial DL BWP.
  • the bits in the remaining bits are used to indicate the relevant information of the DL BWP corresponding to the bit in other DL BWPs corresponding to the carrier, for example, indicating the activation status or activation status of the MG of the DL BWP corresponding to the bit.
  • the length of the Bitmap corresponding to the carrier is N+1, where the first bit in the Bitmap indicates the initial The status of the MG corresponding to the DL BWP. For example, when the first bit is 0, the indication is OFF, and when the first bit is 1, the indication is ON; and the remaining N bits are used to indicate the DL BWP corresponding to the carrier. This bit corresponds to the MG status of the DL BWP. It can be understood that the above is only a specific example. In actual applications, the bits representing the ON/OFF indication information can also be other bits in the Bitmap, and the solution of this application is not limited to this.
  • the UE is configured with one MG, or the UE is configured with (or corresponds to) one MG. If the UE is configured with (or corresponds to) two or more MGs, refer to the following example.
  • the deactivated MG list corresponding to the initial DL BWP carries the unique identifier of the MG, it can be confirmed that when the UE switches to the initial DL BWP, the status of the MG corresponding to the unique identifier is deactivated.
  • Activated state while other MGs preconfigured for the UE, that is, other MG IDs are not in the deactivated MG list corresponding to the initial DL BWP, the status of other MGs defaults to the activated state or is stipulated by the protocol.
  • the network device configures two MGs for the UE, and the unique identifiers are MG1 and MG2 respectively; the UE receives the RRC signaling and parses it to obtain MG1 in the deactivated MG list corresponding to the initial DL BWP. At this time, It can be confirmed that when the UE switches to the initial DL BWP, the state of the MG corresponding to MG1 is the deactivated state, and the state of the MG corresponding to MG2 is the default activated state.
  • the RRC signaling also includes servingCellconfig information, and the status indication information is carried by the servingCellconfig information. That is, the deactivated MG list corresponding to the initial DL BWP can also be in the servingCellconfig information.
  • the network device adds a deactivated MG list (deactivatedMeasGapListForInitialDownlinkBWP) field corresponding to the initial DL BWP in the servingCellconfig information to indicate which MGs need to be deactivated when the UE switches to the initial DL BWP.
  • the format of the deactivatedMeasGapListForInitialDownlinkBWP field is as follows:
  • the RRC signaling also includes the configuration information of the BWP.
  • the status indication information is in the configuration information of the BWP, that is, the deactivated MG list corresponding to the initial DL BWP can also be in the BWP. configuration information.
  • the status indication information is not in the configuration information of the BWP.
  • the BWP configuration information may not be included in the servingCellconfig information.
  • the servingCellconfig information and the BWP configuration information are information at the same level, etc. This application solution does not limit this.
  • the configuration information of the MG can be outside the deactivated MG list, and the deactivated MG list only records the unique identifier of the MG associated with the BWP (for example, the initial DL BWP). At this time, as long as it can pass The unique identifier of the MG can uniquely locate the configuration information of the MG.
  • Figure 5 is a schematic flow chart 3 of a communication method according to an embodiment of the present application. This method can optionally be applied to the system shown in Figure 1, but is not limited thereto. The method includes at least part of the following.
  • the MG is a pre-configured measurement interval pre-MG; the pre-MG is obtained by enhancing the MG; here, the state of the pre-MG (such as activation state or deactivation state) will change with Changes when BWP switches.
  • the MG may also be a Network control small gap (NCSG) configured through RRC signaling, etc.
  • NSG Network control small gap
  • the solution provided by this embodiment is particularly suitable for the scenario where the MG is a pre-MG. That is to say, S510 is specifically: when the terminal device switches to the dormant BWP, determine the state of the pre-MG, and the state of the pre-MG is an activated state or a deactivated state.
  • the terminal device only needs to confirm the status of the MG when it successfully switches to the dormant BWP (in this example, the timing of successfully switching to the dormant BWP is called the successful switching timing).
  • the timing of confirming the status of the MG (in this example, referred to as the status determination timing, for example, when the terminal device switches to the dormant BWP, or at any time after the terminal device switches to the dormant BWP), is different from the status of the MG after the configuration is completed. (This configuration can be performed on the terminal device side, or on the network device side.
  • Scenario 1 The configuration completion time is earlier than the successful switching time. At this time, since the successful switching time is earlier than the status confirmation time, the configuration completion time must also be earlier than the status confirmation time.
  • Scenario 2 The configuration completion time is the same as the successful switching time, both of which are earlier than the status confirmation time.
  • Scenario 3 The configuration completion time is later than the successful switching time, but earlier than the status confirmation time.
  • Scenario 4 The configuration completion time is later than the status confirmation time. In this case, it must also be later than the successful switching time. In this case, the terminal device may need to wait for the MG status configuration to be completed before determining the measurement interval MG status.
  • the terminal device can use the following two methods to determine the status of the MG, specifically including:
  • the terminal device independently determines the status of the MG
  • the first determination method default or protocol stipulation; the state of the MG is the terminal device's default or protocol stipulation.
  • the terminal device defaults the state of the MG to the activated state, or the terminal device defaults the state of the MG to the deactivated state.
  • the terminal device determines that the state of the MG is an activated state or a deactivated state based on protocol regulations. Obviously, this method is simple and requires no additional signaling instructions.
  • the network device and the terminal device need to agree in advance.
  • the terminal device and the network device both default to the MG status as activated. status, or, the default MG status is deactivated.
  • the status of the MG determined by the terminal device and the network device based on the protocol is the same, such as an activated state or a deactivated state.
  • the terminal device determines that the state of the pre-MG is a deactivated state by default or based on a protocol. That is to say, in this method, the UE does not need to consider the status indication information (used to instruct the terminal device to switch to the dormant bandwidth segment BWP to determine the status of the pre-MG) when making judgments, or regardless of the status indication information on the network device side.
  • the indicated state is ON or OFF, and the UE defaults to the deactivated state for subsequent processing.
  • the network device side does not need to configure the status indication information.
  • the network device in order to facilitate the terminal device and the network device to confirm that the MG status is the same, at this time, the network device also defaults to the deactivated status of the MG. In this way, it lays the foundation for full utilization of resources (such as those corresponding to dormant BWP), and at the same time, the flexibility is higher.
  • the second determination method judgment mechanism; specifically includes:
  • Judgment mechanism one The status of the MG is determined based on the frequency domain relationship between the measurement object and the target carrier. Further, the status of the MG is determined based on the frequency domain relationship to determine whether the MG is required. For example, the state of the MG is the activated state when it is determined that the MG is needed based on the frequency domain relationship, and the state of the MG is the deactivated state when it is determined that the MG is not needed based on the frequency domain relationship.
  • this example is in a BWP handover scenario, so the UE capabilities and network indication information have been confirmed. Based on this, when the UE capabilities and/or network indication information are determined, the status of the MG is determined based on measurements. The frequency domain relationship between the object and the target carrier is determined.
  • SSB inter-frequency measurement does not require MG when all the following conditions are met: UE supports inter-frequency measurement without MG; the network indicates that inter-frequency measurement is not applicable to MG; SSB activates BWP within.
  • the terminal device determines the status of the MG based on the frequency domain relationship between the measurement object and the target carrier; further, the terminal device determines the status of the MG based on the frequency domain relationship.
  • the domain relationship determines whether an MG is needed, and then determines the status of the MG based on whether the MG is needed. For example, when the terminal device determines that an MG is needed based on the frequency domain relationship, it determines that the status of the MG is an active state; When the terminal device determines that the MG is not needed based on the frequency domain relationship, it determines that the state of the MG is a deactivated state.
  • the target carrier is a carrier configured by the network device for the terminal device.
  • the target carrier is at least part of the carriers configured by the network device for the terminal device.
  • the at least part of the carriers includes the carrier where the dormant BWP is located; or the target carrier is the network device for the terminal device. All configured carriers, including the carrier where the dormant BWP is located.
  • the second frequency domain relationship the frequency domain relationship between the frequency domain range corresponding to the measurement object and the frequency domain range corresponding to the activated BWP in the target carrier.
  • the third frequency domain relationship the frequency domain relationship between the frequency domain range corresponding to the measurement object and the frequency domain range corresponding to any one or more BWPs configured in the target carrier.
  • the target carrier is a dormant carrier.
  • the frequency domain range corresponding to the target carrier can be: the frequency domain range of the target carrier itself (that is, the entire frequency domain range of the target carrier), or the frequency domain range corresponding to the activated BWP in the target carrier, or the target carrier
  • any of the above possibilities are referred to below in terms of the frequency domain range corresponding to the target carrier.
  • the frequency domain range corresponding to the measurement object is at least one frequency domain range corresponding to the target carrier, such as within the frequency domain range of the target carrier, or within the frequency domain range corresponding to activating BWP in the target carrier, Or within the frequency domain range of at least one BWP configured on the target carrier, etc., it can be confirmed that no MG is required.
  • the frequency domain range corresponding to the measurement object is not within all frequency domain ranges corresponding to the target carrier, such as not within the frequency domain range of the target carrier, and not within the frequency domain range corresponding to the activation of BWP in the target carrier, and not within the target carrier. Within the frequency domain range of at least one configured BWP, etc., it is confirmed that an MG is required.
  • the state of the pre-MG can also be determined based on the frequency domain relationship to determine whether the MG is needed; for example, the state of the pre-MG is based on The state of the pre-MG is an activated state when it is determined that an MG is required based on the frequency domain relationship, and the state of the pre-MG is a deactivated state when it is determined that an MG is not required based on the frequency domain relationship.
  • the state of the pre-MG is an activated state when it is determined that an MG is required based on the frequency domain relationship
  • the state of the pre-MG is a deactivated state when it is determined that an MG is not required based on the frequency domain relationship.
  • Judgment mechanism two The difference between judgment mechanism two and judgment mechanism one is that they target different target carriers during the judgment process.
  • the target carrier is a carrier configured by the network device for the terminal device.
  • the target carrier is specifically all carriers configured by the network device for the terminal device, and all the carriers include The carrier where the dormant BWP is located also includes other carriers.
  • the target carrier in the second judgment mechanism is a carrier other than the carrier corresponding to the dormant BWP among the carriers configured by the network device for the terminal device.
  • the target carrier is one or more of the remaining carriers after removing the carrier where the dormant BWP is located among all the carriers configured by the network device for the terminal device.
  • the target carrier in the second judgment mechanism is the remaining carrier after excluding the carrier where the dormant BWP is located among all the carriers configured by the network device for the terminal device.
  • the network device configures three measurement objects for the terminal device, at this time, only when the frequency domain ranges of all measurement objects fall within the frequency domain range corresponding to any carrier from carrier 1 to carrier 3, can the measurement object be determined to correspond to The frequency domain range falls within the frequency domain range corresponding to the target carrier; otherwise, if there are one or more measurement objects whose frequency domain range does not fall within the frequency domain range corresponding to any carrier from carrier 1 to carrier 3, then all It means that the frequency domain range corresponding to the measurement object does not fall within the frequency domain range corresponding to the target carrier.
  • the status of the MG is controlled by the network device; specifically includes:
  • the terminal device receives the status indication information from a network device.
  • the status of the MG in S510 is determined based on the status indication information.
  • the timing of confirming the status of the MG, the timing of receiving the status indication information (referred to as the receiving timing in this example), and the timing of successfully parsing the status indication information and obtaining the status of the MG may include the following: situation:
  • the reception timing is later than the successful switching timing; in this case, the terminal device receives the status indication information only after successfully switching to the dormant BWP, and then parses the status indication information to determine the status of the MG.
  • the reception timing is earlier than the successful switching timing; in this case, there may be a situation where the parsing timing is earlier than the status confirmation timing.
  • the terminal device first receives the status indication information and parses the status indication information, Obtain the status of the MG. At this time, the terminal device has not yet successfully switched to the dormant BWP. Therefore, the terminal device can temporarily store the parsed status of the MG, and then determine the status of the MG after successfully switching to the dormant BWP.
  • the status indication information is used to indicate that the status of the MG is a deactivated state; specifically, the status indication information is used to indicate that the MG is in a deactivated state when the terminal device switches to the dormant BWP.
  • the status is deactivated.
  • S510 determines the status of the MG specifically: determining that the status of the MG is the deactivated state.
  • the status indication information is carried by RRC signaling. That is to say, the indication information indicating the deactivation state (OFF) (that is, the status indication information) is configured through RRC signaling.
  • the RRC signaling also includes BWP configuration information. For example, the OFF indication information is placed in the servingCellconfig information.
  • the network device while configuring the configuration information of the BWP in the servingCellconfig information, the network device also configures OFF indication information.
  • the OFF indication information is used to indicate that the status of the MG is when the terminal device switches to the dormant BWP. Deactivated state.
  • the OFF indication information in the servingCellconfig information can be information at the same level as the BWP configuration information. The solution of this application does not limit this. As long as the OFF indication information is carried in RRC signaling, it will be included in the solution of this application. within the scope of protection. This makes network control easier and more flexible.
  • the status indication information is indication information corresponding to the carrier corresponding to the dormant BWP, and is used to indicate that the status of the MG is an activated state or a deactivated state.
  • S510 determines the status of the MG specifically: determining whether the status of the MG is a deactivated state or a deactivated state.
  • the status indication information is carrier level indication information, and the carrier level indication information is used to indicate the status of the MG when the terminal device switches to the dormant BWP.
  • the carrier in the dormant state (that is, the carrier corresponding to the dormant BWP) is regarded as a deactivated carrier, and then the ON/OFF indication information of the deactivated carrier layer is configured, and then the ON/OFF indication information of the deactivated carrier layer is configured.
  • the status indication information is carried by RRC signaling. That is to say, the carrier layer indication information (that is, the status indication information) is configured through RRC signaling. Further, the RRC signaling may include the configuration information of the BWP, or the configuration information of the carrier corresponding to the dormant BWP.
  • the UE is configured with one MG, or the UE is configured with (or corresponds to) one MG. If the UE is configured with (or corresponds to) two or more MGs, refer to the following example.
  • the status indication information is carried by RRC signaling, and the status indication information is used to indicate that the status of the MG is the deactivated status when the terminal device switches to the initial DL BWP. Further, the status indication information is carried by the deactivated MG list corresponding to the initial DL BWP in the RRC signaling, that is, the deactivated MG list records the MGs when the terminal device switches to the initial DL BWP.
  • Unique identification ID
  • the deactivated MG list corresponding to the initial DL BWP carries the unique identifier of the MG, it can be confirmed that when the UE switches to the initial DL BWP, the status of the MG corresponding to the unique identifier is deactivated.
  • Activated state while other MGs preconfigured for the UE, that is, other MG IDs are not in the deactivated MG list corresponding to the initial DL BWP, the status of other MGs defaults to the activated state or is stipulated by the protocol.
  • the network device configures two MGs for the UE, and the unique identifiers are MG1 and MG2 respectively; the UE receives the RRC signaling and parses it to obtain MG1 in the deactivated MG list corresponding to the initial DL BWP. At this time, It can be confirmed that when the UE switches to the initial DL BWP, the state of the MG corresponding to MG1 is the deactivated state, and the state of the MG corresponding to MG2 is the default activated state.
  • the RRC signaling also includes servingCellconfig information, and the status indication information is carried by the servingCellconfig information. That is, the deactivated MG list corresponding to the initial DL BWP can also be in the servingCellconfig information.
  • the network device adds a deactivated MG list (deactivatedMeasGapListForInitialDownlinkBWP) field corresponding to the initial DL BWP in the servingCellconfig information to indicate which MGs need to be deactivated when the UE switches to the initial DL BWP.
  • the format of the deactivatedMeasGapListForInitialDownlinkBWP field is as follows:
  • deactivatedMeasGapListForInitialDownlinkBWP SEQUENCE(SIZE(1,maxNorfGapId-r17))of MeasGapId-r17,OPTIONAL.
  • the RRC signaling also includes the configuration information of the BWP.
  • the status indication information is in the configuration information of the BWP, that is, the deactivated MG list corresponding to the initial DL BWP can also be in the BWP. configuration information.
  • the status indication information is not in the configuration information of the BWP.
  • the RRC signaling includes servingCellconfig information
  • the servingCellconfig information includes the configuration information of the BWP.
  • the status indication information is in the configuration information of the BWP, that is, the deactivated MG corresponding to the initial DL BWP.
  • the list is in the configuration information of the BWP. That is to say, the servingCellconfig information of the RRC signaling is configured with BWP configuration information, and the BWP configuration information is configured with a deactivated MG list corresponding to the initial DL BWP.
  • the BWP configuration information may not be included in the servingCellconfig information.
  • the servingCellconfig information and the BWP configuration information are information at the same level, etc. This application solution does not limit this.
  • the configuration information of the MG can be outside the deactivated MG list, and the deactivated MG list only records the unique identifier of the MG associated with the BWP (for example, the initial DL BWP). At this time, as long as it can pass The unique identifier of the MG can uniquely locate the configuration information of the MG.
  • Figure 6 is a schematic flow chart 4 of a communication method according to an embodiment of the present application. This method can optionally be applied to the system shown in Figure 1, but is not limited thereto. The method includes at least part of the following.
  • the network device determines the state of the measurement interval MG when the terminal device switches to the dormant bandwidth segment BWP, and the state of the MG is an activated state or a deactivated state.
  • the initial sleep BWP is the BWP corresponding to the SCell, that is, the network device is configured for the SCell.
  • the MG is a pre-configured measurement interval pre-MG; the pre-MG is obtained by enhancing the MG; here, the state of the pre-MG (such as activation state or deactivation state) will change with Changes when BWP switches.
  • the MG may also be a Network control small gap (NCSG) configured through RRC signaling, etc.
  • NSG Network control small gap
  • the solution provided by this embodiment is particularly suitable for the scenario where the MG is a pre-MG. That is to say, S610 is specifically: the network device determines the state of the pre-MG when the terminal device switches to the dormant BWP, and the state of the pre-MG is the activated state or the deactivated state.
  • timings there are several timings, namely: the timing when the network device determines the status of the MG (this example is called the network confirmation timing), the timing when the network device configures the status of the MG (this example is called the network configuration timing), and the terminal
  • the timing when the device switches to sleep BWP this example is called the timing of successful switching; based on this, there are the following situations:
  • the network configuration timing is earlier than the network confirmation timing; in this case, the successful switching timing may be earlier than the network configuration timing, or the successful switching timing may be later than the network confirmation timing, or the successful switching timing may be between the network configuration timing and the network confirmation timing.
  • the network device can use the following two methods to determine the status of the MG, specifically including:
  • Method 1 for the network device side of the dormant BWP solution the network device and the terminal device agree on the confirmation method
  • the first confirmation method default or protocol stipulation; the status of the MG is the network device's default or protocol stipulation. For example, the network device defaults the state of the MG to the activated state, or the network device defaults the state of the MG to the deactivated state. For another example, the network device determines that the state of the MG is an activated state or a deactivated state based on protocol regulations. This method is simple and requires no additional signaling instructions.
  • the network device determines that the state of the pre-MG is a deactivated state by default or based on a protocol.
  • the terminal device in order to facilitate the terminal device and the network device to confirm that the MG status is the same, at this time, the terminal device also defaults to the deactivated status of the MG. This provides greater flexibility and facilitates network control.
  • the second confirmation method judgment mechanism; specifically includes:
  • this example is in a BWP handover scenario, so the UE capabilities and network indication information have been confirmed. Based on this, when the UE capabilities and/or network indication information are determined, the status of the MG is determined based on measurements. The frequency domain relationship between the object and the target carrier is determined.
  • SSB intra-frequency measurement does not require an MG: the UE indicates through signaling that intra-frequency measurement does not require an MG (that is, the UE supports no-gap capability) ; SSB is within the active BWP; the current active BWP is the initial BWP.
  • SSB inter-frequency measurement does not require MG when all the following conditions are met: UE supports inter-frequency measurement without MG; the network indicates that inter-frequency measurement is not applicable to MG; SSB activates BWP within.
  • the SSB inter-frequency measurement does not require an MG.
  • the state of the MG is deactivated. Activation status. If the UE does not support inter-frequency measurement and does not require the MG capability, at this time, SSB inter-frequency measurement must require the MG, and the state of the MG is the active state and does not need to be determined based on the frequency domain relationship between the measurement object and the target carrier. . In other cases, it needs to be determined based on the frequency domain relationship between the measurement object and the target carrier.
  • the network device determines the status of the MG based on the frequency domain relationship between the measurement object and the target carrier; further, the network device determines the status of the MG based on the frequency domain relationship.
  • the domain relationship determines whether an MG is needed, and then determines the status of the MG based on whether the MG is needed. For example, when the network device determines that an MG is needed based on the frequency domain relationship, it determines that the status of the MG is an active state; When the network device determines that the MG is not needed based on the frequency domain relationship, it determines that the state of the MG is a deactivated state.
  • the target carrier is a carrier configured by the network device for the terminal device.
  • the target carrier is at least part of the carriers configured by the network device for the terminal device.
  • the at least part of the carriers includes the carrier where the dormant BWP is located; or the target carrier is the network device for the terminal device. All configured carriers, including the carrier where the dormant BWP is located.
  • the frequency domain relationship between the measurement object and the target carrier may be specifically at least one of the following relationships:
  • the frequency domain range corresponding to the target carrier can be: the frequency domain range of the target carrier itself (that is, the entire frequency domain range of the target carrier), or the frequency domain range corresponding to the activated BWP in the target carrier, or the target carrier
  • any of the above possibilities are referred to below in terms of the frequency domain range corresponding to the target carrier.
  • the network device when the frequency domain range corresponding to the measurement object is within the frequency domain range corresponding to the target carrier, the MG is not required; at this time, the network device can determine that the state of the MG is a deactivated state. Otherwise, when the frequency domain range corresponding to the measurement object is not within the frequency domain range corresponding to the target carrier, an MG is required; at this time, the network device can determine that the state of the MG is an active state.
  • the frequency domain range corresponding to the measurement object is not within all frequency domain ranges corresponding to the target carrier, such as not within the frequency domain range of the target carrier, and not within the frequency domain range corresponding to the activation of BWP in the target carrier, and not within the target carrier. Within the frequency domain range of at least one configured BWP, etc., it is confirmed that an MG is required.
  • the network device configures three measurement objects for the terminal device, and each measurement object corresponds to a certain frequency domain range; the network device configures 4 carriers for the terminal device (the 4 carriers are all target carriers); this When, only when the frequency domain range of all measurement objects is within the frequency domain range corresponding to the target carrier (any one of the four carriers is enough), can it be determined that the frequency domain range corresponding to the measurement object is within the frequency domain range corresponding to the target carrier. Within the frequency domain range; otherwise, if the frequency domain range of one or more measurement objects is not within the frequency domain range corresponding to the target carrier, it means that the frequency domain range corresponding to the measurement object is not within the frequency domain range corresponding to the target carrier. .
  • the state of the pre-MG can also be determined based on the frequency domain relationship to determine whether the MG is needed; for example, the state of the pre-MG is based on The state of the pre-MG is an activated state when it is determined that an MG is required based on the frequency domain relationship, and the state of the pre-MG is a deactivated state when it is determined that an MG is not required based on the frequency domain relationship.
  • the state of the pre-MG is an activated state when it is determined that an MG is required based on the frequency domain relationship
  • the state of the pre-MG is a deactivated state when it is determined that an MG is not required based on the frequency domain relationship.
  • Judgment mechanism two The difference between judgment mechanism two and judgment mechanism one is that they target different target carriers during the judgment process.
  • the target carrier is a carrier configured by the network device for the terminal device.
  • the target carrier is specifically all carriers configured by the network device for the terminal device, and all the carriers include The carrier where the dormant BWP is located also includes other carriers.
  • the target carrier in the second judgment mechanism is a carrier other than the carrier corresponding to the dormant BWP among the carriers configured by the network device for the terminal device.
  • the target carrier is one or more of the remaining carriers after removing the carrier where the dormant BWP is located among all the carriers configured by the network device for the terminal device.
  • Method 2 on the network device side of the dormant BWP solution the network device controls the status of the MG.
  • the status indication information is used to indicate that the status of the MG is a deactivated state; specifically, the status indication information is used to indicate that the MG is in a deactivated state when the terminal device switches to the dormant BWP.
  • the status is deactivated.
  • the status indication information is carried by RRC signaling. That is to say, the indication information indicating the deactivation state (OFF) (that is, the status indication information) is configured through RRC signaling.
  • the RRC signaling also includes BWP configuration information.
  • the OFF indication information is placed in the servingCellconfig information.
  • the network device while configuring the configuration information of the BWP in the servingCellconfig information, the network device also configures OFF indication information.
  • the OFF indication information is used to indicate that the status of the MG is when the terminal device switches to the dormant BWP. Deactivated state.
  • the OFF indication information in the servingCellconfig information can be information at the same level as the BWP configuration information.
  • the solution of this application does not limit this. As long as the OFF indication information is carried in RRC signaling, it will be included in the solution of this application. within the scope of protection. This makes network control easier and more flexible.
  • the UE is configured with one MG, or the UE is configured with (or corresponds to) one MG. If the UE is configured with (or corresponds to) two or more MGs, refer to the following example.
  • the status indication information is carried by RRC signaling, and the status indication information is used to indicate that the status of the MG is the deactivated status when the terminal device switches to the initial DL BWP. Further, the status indication information is carried by the deactivated MG list corresponding to the initial DL BWP in the RRC signaling, that is, the deactivated MG list records the MGs when the terminal device switches to the initial DL BWP.
  • Unique identification ID
  • the format of the deactivatedMeasGapListForInitialDownlinkBWP field is as follows:
  • deactivatedMeasGapListForInitialDownlinkBWP SEQUENCE(SIZE(1,maxNorfGapId-r17))of MeasGapId-r17,OPTIONAL.
  • the RRC signaling also includes the configuration information of the BWP.
  • the status indication information is in the configuration information of the BWP, that is, the deactivated MG list corresponding to the initial DL BWP can also be in the BWP. configuration information.
  • the status indication information is not in the configuration information of the BWP.
  • the RRC signaling includes servingCellconfig information
  • the servingCellconfig information includes the configuration information of the BWP.
  • the status indication information is in the configuration information of the BWP, that is, the deactivated MG corresponding to the initial DL BWP.
  • the list is in the configuration information of the BWP. That is to say, the servingCellconfig information of the RRC signaling is configured with BWP configuration information, and the BWP configuration information is configured with a deactivated MG list corresponding to the initial DL BWP.
  • the BWP configuration information may not be included in the servingCellconfig information.
  • the servingCellconfig information and the BWP configuration information are information at the same level, etc. This application solution does not limit this.
  • the configuration information of the MG can be outside the deactivated MG list, and the deactivated MG list only records the unique identifier of the MG associated with the BWP (for example, the initial DL BWP). At this time, as long as it can pass The unique identifier of the MG can uniquely locate the configuration information of the MG.
  • FIG. 7 is a schematic block diagram 1 of a terminal device according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • the terminal device 700 may include:
  • the first determining unit 710 is configured to determine the state of the measurement interval MG when switching to the initial downlink DL bandwidth segment BWP, and the state of the MG is an activated state or a deactivated state.
  • the status of the MG is determined based on status indication information; wherein the status indication information is used to indicate that the status of the MG is an activated state or a deactivated state.
  • the terminal device 700 further includes: a first receiving unit configured to receive the status indication information from a network device.
  • the status indication information is carried by a system message.
  • system message further includes: configuration information of the initial DL BWP.
  • the status indication information is carried by Radio Resource Control (RRC) signaling.
  • RRC Radio Resource Control
  • the status indication information is carried by the serving cell configuration information in the RRC signaling.
  • the status indication information is carried by BWP configuration information in the RRC signaling.
  • the state of the MG is default or specified by the protocol.
  • the measurement interval MG is a preconfigured measurement interval pre-MG.
  • the terminal device 700 in the embodiment of the present application can implement the corresponding functions of the terminal device in the foregoing method embodiment.
  • each module (sub-module, unit or component, etc.) in the terminal device 700 please refer to the corresponding description in the above method embodiment, and will not be described again here.
  • the functions described for each module (sub-module, unit or component, etc.) in the terminal device 700 of the application embodiment can be implemented by different modules (sub-module, unit or component, etc.), or can be implemented by the same module. Module (submodule, unit or component, etc.) implementation.
  • FIG. 8 is a schematic block diagram of a network device according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • the network device 800 may include:
  • the second determining unit 810 is configured to determine the state of the measurement interval MG when the terminal device switches to the initial downlink DL bandwidth segment BWP, and the state of the MG is an activated state or a deactivated state.
  • it also includes:
  • the first sending unit is configured to send status indication information, where the status indication information is used to indicate that the status of the MG is an activation state or a deactivation state.
  • the status indication information is carried by a system message.
  • system message further includes: configuration information of the initial DL BWP.
  • the status indication information is carried by Radio Resource Control (RRC) signaling.
  • RRC Radio Resource Control
  • the status indication information is carried by the serving cell configuration information in the RRC signaling.
  • the status indication information is carried by BWP configuration information in the RRC signaling.
  • the state of the MG is default or specified by the protocol.
  • the measurement interval MG is a preconfigured measurement interval pre-MG.
  • the network device 800 in the embodiment of the present application can implement the corresponding functions of the network device in the foregoing method embodiment.
  • each module (sub-module, unit or component, etc.) in the network device 800 please refer to the corresponding description in the above method embodiment, and will not be described again here.
  • the functions described for each module (sub-module, unit or component, etc.) in the network device 800 of the application embodiment can be implemented by different modules (sub-module, unit or component, etc.), or can be implemented by the same Module (submodule, unit or component, etc.) implementation.
  • FIG. 9 is a second schematic block diagram of a terminal device according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • the terminal device 900 may include:
  • the third determination unit 910 is configured to determine the state of the measurement interval MG when switching to the dormant bandwidth segment BWP, and the state of the MG is an activated state or a deactivated state.
  • the status of the MG is determined based on the frequency domain relationship between the measurement object and the target carrier.
  • the status of the MG is determined based on the frequency domain relationship to determine whether an MG is required.
  • the state of the MG is an active state when it is determined that an MG is required based on the frequency domain relationship.
  • the state of the MG is a deactivated state when it is determined that the MG is not needed based on the frequency domain relationship.
  • the target carrier is a carrier configured by a network device for the terminal device.
  • the target carrier is a carrier other than the carrier corresponding to the dormant BWP among the carriers configured by the network device for the terminal device.
  • the status of the MG is determined based on status indication information.
  • it also includes:
  • the second receiving unit is configured to receive the status indication information from the network device.
  • the status indication information is used to indicate that the status of the MG is a deactivated state.
  • the status indication information is indication information corresponding to the carrier corresponding to the dormant BWP, and is used to indicate that the status of the MG is an activated state or a deactivated state.
  • the status indication information is carried by Radio Resource Control (RRC) signaling.
  • RRC Radio Resource Control
  • the status indication information is carried by BWP configuration information in the RRC signaling.
  • the state of the MG is default or specified by the protocol.
  • the state of the MG is deactivated by default or specified by the protocol.
  • the measurement interval MG is a preconfigured measurement interval pre-MG.
  • the terminal device 900 in the embodiment of the present application can implement the corresponding functions of the terminal device in the foregoing method embodiment.
  • each module (sub-module, unit or component, etc.) in the terminal device 900 please refer to the corresponding description in the above method embodiment, and will not be described again here.
  • the functions described for each module (sub-module, unit or component, etc.) in the terminal device 900 in the embodiment of the application can be implemented by different modules (sub-module, unit or component, etc.), or can be implemented by the same module. Module (submodule, unit or component, etc.) implementation.
  • FIG. 10 is a schematic block diagram of a network device according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • the network device 1000 may include:
  • the fourth determining unit 1010 is configured to determine the state of the measurement interval MG when the terminal device switches to the dormant bandwidth segment BWP, and the state of the MG is an activated state or a deactivated state.
  • the status of the MG is determined based on the frequency domain relationship between the measurement object and the target carrier.
  • the status of the MG is determined based on the frequency domain relationship to determine whether an MG is required.
  • the state of the MG is an active state when it is determined that an MG is required based on the frequency domain relationship.
  • the state of the MG is a deactivated state when it is determined that the MG is not needed based on the frequency domain relationship.
  • the target carrier is a carrier configured by a network device for the terminal device.
  • the target carrier is a carrier other than the carrier corresponding to the dormant BWP among the carriers configured by the network device for the terminal device.
  • it also includes:
  • the second sending unit is configured to send status indication information, where the status indication information is used to indicate that the status of the MG is a deactivated state.
  • it also includes:
  • the third sending unit is configured to send status indication information, where the status indication information is indication information corresponding to the carrier corresponding to the dormant BWP, and is used to indicate the status of the MG when the terminal device switches to the dormant BWP. is activated or deactivated.
  • the status indication information is carried by Radio Resource Control (RRC) signaling.
  • RRC Radio Resource Control
  • the status indication information is carried by BWP configuration information in the RRC signaling.
  • the state of the MG is default or specified by the protocol.
  • the state of the MG is deactivated by default or specified by the protocol.
  • the measurement interval MG is a preconfigured measurement interval pre-MG.
  • the network device 1000 in the embodiment of the present application can implement the corresponding functions of the network device in the foregoing method embodiment.
  • each module (sub-module, unit or component, etc.) in the network device 1000 please refer to the corresponding description in the above method embodiment, and will not be described again here.
  • the functions described for each module (sub-module, unit or component, etc.) in the network device 1000 of the application embodiment can be implemented by different modules (sub-module, unit or component, etc.), or can be implemented by the same Module (submodule, unit or component, etc.) implementation.
  • FIG 11 is a schematic structural diagram of a communication device according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • the communication device 1100 includes a processor 1110, and the processor 1110 can call and run a computer program from the memory, so that the communication device 1100 implements the method in the embodiment of the present application.
  • the communication device 1100 may further include a memory 1120.
  • the processor 1110 can call and run the computer program from the memory 1120, so that the communication device 1100 implements the method in the embodiment of the present application.
  • the memory 1120 may be a separate device independent of the processor 1110, or may be integrated into the processor 1110.
  • the communication device 1100 may also include a transceiver 1130, and the processor 1110 may control the transceiver 1130 to communicate with other devices. Specifically, the communication device 1100 may send information or data to, or receive data from, other devices. Information or data sent.
  • the transceiver 1130 may include a transmitter and a receiver.
  • the transceiver 1130 may further include an antenna, and the number of antennas may be one or more.
  • the communication device 1100 may be a network device according to the embodiment of the present application, and the communication device 1100 may implement the corresponding processes implemented by the network device in each method of the embodiment of the present application. For simplicity, in This will not be described again.
  • the communication device 1100 can be a terminal device in the embodiment of the present application, and the communication device 1100 can implement the corresponding processes implemented by the terminal device in each method of the embodiment of the present application. For simplicity, in This will not be described again.
  • FIG 12 is a schematic structural diagram of a chip according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • the chip 1200 includes a processor 1210, and the processor 1210 can call and run a computer program from the memory to implement the method in the embodiment of the present application.
  • the chip 1200 may also include a memory 1220.
  • the processor 1210 can call and run the computer program from the memory 1220 to implement the method executed by the terminal device or network device in the embodiment of the present application.
  • the memory 1220 may be a separate device independent of the processor 1210, or may be integrated into the processor 1210.
  • the chip 1200 may also include an input interface 1230.
  • the processor 710 can control the input interface 1230 to communicate with other devices or chips. Specifically, it can obtain information or data sent by other devices or chips.
  • the chip 1200 may also include an output interface 1240.
  • the processor 1210 can control the output interface 1240 to communicate with other devices or chips. Specifically, it can output information or data to other devices or chips.
  • the chip can be applied to the network device in the embodiment of the present application, and the chip can implement the corresponding processes implemented by the network device in each method of the embodiment of the present application. For the sake of brevity, this chip is not mentioned here. Again.
  • the chip can be applied to the terminal device in the embodiment of the present application, and the chip can implement the corresponding processes implemented by the terminal device in the various methods of the embodiment of the present application. For the sake of brevity, this is not mentioned here. Again.
  • the chips used in network equipment and terminal equipment can be the same chip or different chips.
  • chips mentioned in the embodiments of this application may also be called system-on-chip, system-on-a-chip, system-on-chip or system-on-chip, etc.
  • the processor mentioned above can be a general-purpose processor, a digital signal processor (DSP), an off-the-shelf programmable gate array (FPGA), an application specific integrated circuit (ASIC), or Other programmable logic devices, transistor logic devices, discrete hardware components, etc.
  • DSP digital signal processor
  • FPGA off-the-shelf programmable gate array
  • ASIC application specific integrated circuit
  • the above-mentioned general processor may be a microprocessor or any conventional processor.
  • non-volatile memory may be volatile memory or non-volatile memory, or may include both volatile and non-volatile memory.
  • non-volatile memory can be read-only memory (ROM), programmable ROM (PROM), erasable programmable read-only memory (erasable PROM, EPROM), electrically removable memory. Erase electrically programmable read-only memory (EPROM, EEPROM) or flash memory.
  • Volatile memory can be random access memory (RAM).
  • the memory in the embodiment of the present application can also be a static random access memory (static RAM, SRAM), a dynamic random access memory (dynamic RAM, DRAM), Synchronous dynamic random access memory (synchronous DRAM, SDRAM), double data rate synchronous dynamic random access memory (double data rate SDRAM, DDR SDRAM), enhanced synchronous dynamic random access memory (enhanced SDRAM, ESDRAM), synchronous connection Dynamic random access memory (synch link DRAM, SLDRAM) and direct memory bus random access memory (Direct Rambus RAM, DR RAM) and so on. That is, memories in embodiments of the present application are intended to include, but are not limited to, these and any other suitable types of memories.
  • FIG. 13 is a schematic block diagram of a communication system according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • the communication system 1300 includes a terminal device 1310 and a network device 1320.
  • the network device 1320 determines when the terminal device switches to the initial downlink DL bandwidth segment BWP. In the case of segment BWP, the state of the interval MG is measured, and the state of the MG is the activated state or the deactivated state;
  • the network device 1320 determines that when the terminal device switches to the dormant bandwidth segment BWP In case of measurement interval, the state of the MG is the activated state or the deactivated state.
  • the terminal device 1310 can be used to implement the corresponding functions implemented by the terminal device in the above method
  • the network device 1320 can be used to implement the corresponding functions implemented by the network device in the above method.
  • no further details will be given here.
  • the computer program product includes one or more computer instructions.
  • the computer may be a general purpose computer, a special purpose computer, a computer network, or other programmable device.
  • the computer instructions may be stored in or transmitted from one computer-readable storage medium to another computer-readable storage medium, for example, the computer instructions may be transmitted over a wired connection from a website, computer, server, or data center (such as coaxial cable, optical fiber, Digital Subscriber Line (DSL)) or wireless (such as infrared, wireless, microwave, etc.) means to transmit to another website, computer, server or data center.
  • the computer-readable storage medium can be any available medium that can be accessed by a computer or a data storage device such as a server or data center integrated with one or more available media.
  • the available media may be magnetic media (eg, floppy disk, hard disk, tape), optical media (eg, DVD), or semiconductor media (eg, Solid State Disk (SSD)), etc.
  • the size of the sequence numbers of the above-mentioned processes does not mean the order of execution.
  • the execution order of each process should be determined by its functions and internal logic, and should not be used in the embodiments of the present application.
  • the implementation process constitutes any limitation.

Abstract

The present application relates to a communication method, a terminal device, and a network device. The method comprises: when a terminal device switches to an initial downlink (DL) bandwidth part (BWP), determining the state of a measurement gap (MG), wherein the state of the MG is an activated state or a deactivated state.

Description

通信方法、终端设备和网络设备Communication method, terminal equipment and network equipment 技术领域Technical field
本申请涉及通信领域,更具体地,涉及一种通信方法、终端设备和网络设备。The present application relates to the field of communication, and more specifically, to a communication method, terminal equipment and network equipment.
背景技术Background technique
当终端设备工作在不同的带宽分段(Bandwidth Part,BWP)时,对于测量,以同步信号块(Synchronization Signal and PBCH Block,SSB)测量为例,即使是同一个测量对象,当终端设备工作在不同的BWP时,也可能存在不同的测量需求,比如,需要测量间隔(Measurement Gap,MG)或不需要MG。但基于终端设备所工作的带宽分段来确定MG的状态,尚未有明确结论。When the terminal equipment works in different bandwidth segments (Bandwidth Part, BWP), for measurement, take the synchronization signal block (Synchronization Signal and PBCH Block, SSB) measurement as an example. Even if it is the same measurement object, when the terminal equipment works in Different BWPs may also have different measurement requirements, for example, a measurement gap (Measurement Gap, MG) is required or no MG is required. However, there is no clear conclusion yet on determining the status of the MG based on the bandwidth segment in which the terminal device works.
发明内容Contents of the invention
本申请实施例提供一种通信方法、终端设备和网络设备,可以在终端设备切换到特定BWP,比如初始下行BWP,或者休眠BWP的情况下,确定MG的状态。Embodiments of the present application provide a communication method, terminal equipment, and network equipment that can determine the status of an MG when the terminal equipment switches to a specific BWP, such as an initial downlink BWP or a dormant BWP.
本申请实施例提供一种通信方法,包括:The embodiment of the present application provides a communication method, including:
终端设备切换到初始下行DL带宽分段BWP的情况下,确定测量间隔MG的状态,所述MG的状态为激活状态或去激活状态。When the terminal device switches to the initial downlink DL bandwidth segment BWP, the state of the measurement interval MG is determined, and the state of the MG is an activated state or a deactivated state.
本申请实施例提供一种通信方法,包括:The embodiment of the present application provides a communication method, including:
网络设备确定在终端设备切换到初始下行DL带宽分段BWP的情况下测量间隔MG的状态,所述MG的状态为激活状态或去激活状态。The network device determines the state of the measurement interval MG when the terminal device switches to the initial downlink DL bandwidth segment BWP, and the state of the MG is an activated state or a deactivated state.
本申请实施例提供一种通信方法,包括:The embodiment of the present application provides a communication method, including:
终端设备切换到休眠带宽分段BWP的情况下,确定测量间隔MG的状态,所述MG的状态为激活状态或去激活状态。When the terminal device switches to the dormant bandwidth segment BWP, the state of the measurement interval MG is determined, and the state of the MG is an activated state or a deactivated state.
本申请实施例提供一种通信方法,包括:The embodiment of the present application provides a communication method, including:
网络设备确定在终端设备切换到休眠带宽分段BWP的情况下测量间隔MG的状态,所述MG的状态为激活状态或去激活状态。The network device determines the state of the measurement interval MG in the case where the terminal device switches to the dormant bandwidth segment BWP, and the state of the MG is an activated state or a deactivated state.
本申请实施例提供一种终端设备,包括:An embodiment of the present application provides a terminal device, including:
第一确定单元,用于切换到初始下行DL带宽分段BWP的情况下,确定测量间隔MG的状态,所述MG的状态为激活状态或去激活状态。The first determination unit is configured to determine the state of the measurement interval MG when switching to the initial downlink DL bandwidth segment BWP, and the state of the MG is an activated state or a deactivated state.
本申请实施例提供一种网络设备,包括:This embodiment of the present application provides a network device, including:
第二确定单元,用于确定在终端设备切换到初始下行DL带宽分段BWP的情况下测量间隔MG的状态,所述MG的状态为激活状态或去激活状态。The second determination unit is configured to determine the state of the measurement interval MG when the terminal device switches to the initial downlink DL bandwidth segment BWP, and the state of the MG is an activated state or a deactivated state.
本申请实施例提供一种终端设备,包括:An embodiment of the present application provides a terminal device, including:
第三确定单元,用于切换到休眠带宽分段BWP的情况下,确定测量间隔MG的状态,所述MG的状态为激活状态或去激活状态。The third determination unit is configured to determine the state of the measurement interval MG when switching to the dormant bandwidth segment BWP, and the state of the MG is an activated state or a deactivated state.
本申请实施例提供一种网络设备,包括:This embodiment of the present application provides a network device, including:
第四确定单元,用于确定在终端设备切换到休眠带宽分段BWP的情况下测量间隔MG 的状态,所述MG的状态为激活状态或去激活状态。The fourth determination unit is used to determine the state of the measurement interval MG when the terminal device switches to the dormant bandwidth segment BWP, and the state of the MG is an activated state or a deactivated state.
本申请实施例提供一种终端设备,包括处理器、存储器和收发器。该存储器用于存储计算机程序,该处理器用于控制该收发器与其他设备进行通信,该处理器还用于调用并运行该存储器中存储的计算机程序,以使该终端设备执行上述应用于终端设备侧的通信方法。An embodiment of the present application provides a terminal device, including a processor, a memory, and a transceiver. The memory is used to store computer programs, and the processor is used to control the transceiver to communicate with other devices. The processor is also used to call and run the computer program stored in the memory, so that the terminal device executes the above application to the terminal device. side communication method.
本申请实施例提供一种网络设备,包括处理器、存储器和收发器。该存储器用于存储计算机程序,该处理器用于控制该收发器与其他设备进行通信,该处理器还用于调用并运行该存储器中存储的计算机程序,以使该网络设备执行上述的应用于网络设备侧通信方法。An embodiment of the present application provides a network device, including a processor, a memory, and a transceiver. The memory is used to store computer programs, and the processor is used to control the transceiver to communicate with other devices. The processor is also used to call and run the computer programs stored in the memory, so that the network device performs the above-mentioned application to the network. Device side communication method.
本申请实施例提供一种芯片,用于实现上述应用于终端设备侧的通信方法;或者,用于实现上述的应用于网络设备侧的通信方法。Embodiments of the present application provide a chip that is used to implement the above communication method applied to the terminal device side; or to implement the above communication method applied to the network device side.
具体地,该芯片包括:处理器,用于从存储器中调用并运行计算机程序,使得安装有该芯片的设备执行上述的应用于终端设备侧的通信方法;或者,用于实现上述的应用于网络设备侧的通信方法。Specifically, the chip includes: a processor, used to call and run a computer program from the memory, so that the device installed with the chip executes the above-mentioned communication method applied to the terminal device side; or, used to implement the above-mentioned communication method applied to the network Communication method on the device side.
本申请实施例提供一种计算机可读存储介质,用于存储计算机程序,当该计算机程序被设备运行时使得该设备执行上述的应用于终端设备侧的通信方法;或者,执行上述的应用于网络设备侧的通信方法。Embodiments of the present application provide a computer-readable storage medium for storing a computer program. When the computer program is run by a device, the device performs the above-mentioned communication method applied to the terminal device side; or, performs the above-mentioned communication method applied to the network. Communication method on the device side.
本申请实施例提供一种计算机程序产品,包括计算机程序指令,该计算机程序指令使得计算机执行上述的应用于终端设备侧的通信方法;或者,执行上述的应用于网络设备侧的通信方法。Embodiments of the present application provide a computer program product, including computer program instructions, which cause the computer to execute the above communication method applied to the terminal device side; or to execute the above communication method applied to the network device side.
本申请实施例提供一种计算机程序,当其在计算机上运行时,使得计算机执行上述的应用于终端设备侧的通信方法;或者,执行上述的应用于网络设备侧的通信方法。Embodiments of the present application provide a computer program that, when run on a computer, causes the computer to execute the above communication method applied to the terminal device side; or to execute the above communication method applied to the network device side.
本申请实施例,可以在终端设备切换到特定BWP,比如初始下行BWP,或者休眠BWP的情况下,确定MG的状态。In the embodiment of this application, the status of the MG can be determined when the terminal device switches to a specific BWP, such as the initial downlink BWP or the dormant BWP.
附图说明Description of the drawings
图1是根据本申请实施例的应用场景的示意图。Figure 1 is a schematic diagram of an application scenario according to an embodiment of the present application.
图2是根据本申请一实施例BWP切换的场景示意图。Figure 2 is a schematic diagram of a BWP switching scenario according to an embodiment of the present application.
图3是根据本申请一实施例的通信方法的示意性流程图一。Figure 3 is a schematic flowchart 1 of a communication method according to an embodiment of the present application.
图4是根据本申请一实施例的通信方法的示意性流程图二。Figure 4 is a schematic flowchart 2 of a communication method according to an embodiment of the present application.
图5是根据本申请一实施例的通信方法的示意性流程图三。Figure 5 is a schematic flow chart 3 of a communication method according to an embodiment of the present application.
图6是根据本申请一实施例的通信方法的示意性流程图四。Figure 6 is a schematic flow chart 4 of a communication method according to an embodiment of the present application.
图7是根据本申请一实施例的终端设备的示意性框图一。Figure 7 is a schematic block diagram 1 of a terminal device according to an embodiment of the present application.
图8是根据本申请一实施例的网络设备的示意性框图一。Figure 8 is a schematic block diagram 1 of a network device according to an embodiment of the present application.
图9是根据本申请一实施例的终端设备的示意性框图二。Figure 9 is a second schematic block diagram of a terminal device according to an embodiment of the present application.
图10是根据本申请一实施例的网络设备的示意性框图二。Figure 10 is a second schematic block diagram of a network device according to an embodiment of the present application.
图11是根据本申请实施例的通信设备示意性框图。Figure 11 is a schematic block diagram of a communication device according to an embodiment of the present application.
图12是根据本申请实施例的芯片的示意性框图。Figure 12 is a schematic block diagram of a chip according to an embodiment of the present application.
图13是根据本申请实施例的通信系统的示意性框图。Figure 13 is a schematic block diagram of a communication system according to an embodiment of the present application.
具体实施方式Detailed ways
下面将结合本申请实施例中的附图,对本申请实施例中的技术方案进行描述。The technical solutions in the embodiments of the present application will be described below with reference to the drawings in the embodiments of the present application.
本申请实施例的技术方案可以应用于各种通信系统,例如:全球移动通讯(Global System of Mobile communication,GSM)系统、码分多址(Code Division Multiple Access,CDMA)系统、宽带码分多址(Wideband Code Division Multiple Access,WCDMA)系统、通用分组无线业务(General Packet Radio Service,GPRS)、长期演进(Long Term Evolution,LTE)系统、先进的长期演进(Advanced long term evolution,LTE-A)系统、新无线(New Radio,NR)系统、NR系统的演进系统、非授权频谱上的LTE(LTE-based access to unlicensed spectrum,LTE-U)系统、非授权频谱上的NR(NR-based access to unlicensed spectrum,NR-U)系统、非地面通信网络(Non-Terrestrial Networks,NTN)系统、通用移动通信系统(Universal Mobile Telecommunication System,UMTS)、无线局域网(Wireless Local Area Networks,WLAN)、无线保真(Wireless Fidelity,WiFi)、第五代通信(5th-Generation,5G)系统或其他通信系统等。The technical solutions of the embodiments of the present application can be applied to various communication systems, such as: Global System of Mobile communication (GSM) system, Code Division Multiple Access (Code Division Multiple Access, CDMA) system, broadband code division multiple access (Wideband Code Division Multiple Access, WCDMA) system, General Packet Radio Service (GPRS), Long Term Evolution (LTE) system, Advanced long term evolution (LTE-A) system , New Radio (NR) system, evolution system of NR system, LTE (LTE-based access to unlicensed spectrum, LTE-U) system on unlicensed spectrum, NR (NR-based access to unlicensed spectrum) unlicensed spectrum (NR-U) system, Non-Terrestrial Networks (NTN) system, Universal Mobile Telecommunication System (UMTS), Wireless Local Area Networks (WLAN), wireless fidelity (Wireless Fidelity, WiFi), fifth-generation communication (5th-Generation, 5G) system or other communication systems, etc.
通常来说,传统的通信系统支持的连接数有限,也易于实现,然而,随着通信技术的发展,移动通信系统将不仅支持传统的通信,还将支持例如,设备到设备(Device to Device,D2D)通信,机器到机器(Machine to Machine,M2M)通信,机器类型通信(Machine Type Communication,MTC),车辆间(Vehicle to Vehicle,V2V)通信,或车联网(Vehicle to everything,V2X)通信等,本申请实施例也可以应用于这些通信系统。Generally speaking, traditional communication systems support a limited number of connections and are easy to implement. However, with the development of communication technology, mobile communication systems will not only support traditional communication, but also support, for example, Device to Device, D2D) communication, Machine to Machine (M2M) communication, Machine Type Communication (MTC), Vehicle to Vehicle (V2V) communication, or Vehicle to everything (V2X) communication, etc. , the embodiments of the present application can also be applied to these communication systems.
在一种可能的实现方式中,本申请实施例中的通信系统可以应用于载波聚合(Carrier Aggregation,CA)场景,也可以应用于双连接(Dual Connectivity,DC)场景,还可以应用于独立(Standalone,SA)布网场景。In a possible implementation manner, the communication system in the embodiment of the present application can be applied to a carrier aggregation (Carrier Aggregation, CA) scenario, a dual connectivity (Dual Connectivity, DC) scenario, or an independent ( Standalone, SA) network deployment scenario.
在一种可能的实现方式中,本申请实施例中的通信系统可以应用于非授权频谱,其中,非授权频谱也可以认为是共享频谱;或者,本申请实施例中的通信系统也可以应用于授权频谱,其中,授权频谱也可以认为是非共享频谱。In a possible implementation, the communication system in the embodiment of the present application can be applied to unlicensed spectrum, where the unlicensed spectrum can also be considered as shared spectrum; or, the communication system in the embodiment of the present application can also be applied to Licensed spectrum, where licensed spectrum can also be considered as unshared spectrum.
本申请实施例结合网络设备和终端设备描述了各个实施例,其中,终端设备也可以称为用户设备(User Equipment,UE)、接入终端、用户单元、用户站、移动站、移动台、远方站、远程终端、移动设备、用户终端、终端、无线通信设备、用户代理或用户装置等。The embodiments of this application describe various embodiments in combination with network equipment and terminal equipment. The terminal equipment may also be called user equipment (User Equipment, UE), access terminal, user unit, user station, mobile station, mobile station, remote station, remote terminal, mobile device, user terminal, terminal, wireless communication equipment, user agent or user device, etc.
终端设备可以是WLAN中的站点(STAION,ST),可以是蜂窝电话、无绳电话、会话启动协议(Session Initiation Protocol,SIP)电话、无线本地环路(Wireless Local Loop,WLL)站、个人数字处理(Personal Digital Assistant,PDA)设备、具有无线通信功能的手持设备、计算设备或连接到无线调制解调器的其它处理设备、车载设备、可穿戴设备、下一代通信系统例如NR网络中的终端设备,或者未来演进的公共陆地移动网络(Public Land Mobile Network,PLMN)网络中的终端设备等。The terminal device can be a station (ST) in the WLAN, a cellular phone, a cordless phone, a Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) phone, a wireless local loop (Wireless Local Loop, WLL) station, or a personal digital processing unit. (Personal Digital Assistant, PDA) devices, handheld devices with wireless communication capabilities, computing devices or other processing devices connected to wireless modems, vehicle-mounted devices, wearable devices, next-generation communication systems such as terminal devices in NR networks, or in the future Terminal equipment in the evolved Public Land Mobile Network (PLMN) network, etc.
在本申请实施例中,终端设备可以部署在陆地上,包括室内或室外、手持、穿戴或车载;也可以部署在水面上(如轮船等);还可以部署在空中(例如飞机、气球和卫星上等)。In the embodiment of this application, the terminal device can be deployed on land, including indoor or outdoor, handheld, wearable or vehicle-mounted; it can also be deployed on water (such as ships, etc.); it can also be deployed in the air (such as aircraft, balloons and satellites). superior).
在本申请实施例中,终端设备可以是手机(Mobile Phone)、平板电脑(Pad)、带无线收发功能的电脑、虚拟现实(Virtual Reality,VR)终端设备、增强现实(Augmented Reality, AR)终端设备、工业控制(industrial control)中的无线终端设备、无人驾驶(self driving)中的无线终端设备、远程医疗(remote medical)中的无线终端设备、智能电网(smart grid)中的无线终端设备、运输安全(transportation safety)中的无线终端设备、智慧城市(smart city)中的无线终端设备或智慧家庭(smart home)中的无线终端设备等。In the embodiment of this application, the terminal device may be a mobile phone (Mobile Phone), a tablet computer (Pad), a computer with wireless transceiver function, a virtual reality (Virtual Reality, VR) terminal device, or an augmented reality (Augmented Reality, AR) terminal. Equipment, wireless terminal equipment in industrial control, wireless terminal equipment in self-driving, wireless terminal equipment in remote medical, wireless terminal equipment in smart grid , wireless terminal equipment in transportation safety, wireless terminal equipment in smart city, or wireless terminal equipment in smart home, etc.
作为示例而非限定,在本申请实施例中,该终端设备还可以是可穿戴设备。可穿戴设备也可以称为穿戴式智能设备,是应用穿戴式技术对日常穿戴进行智能化设计、开发出可以穿戴的设备的总称,如眼镜、手套、手表、服饰及鞋等。可穿戴设备即直接穿在身上,或是整合到用户的衣服或配件的一种便携式设备。可穿戴设备不仅仅是一种硬件设备,更是通过软件支持以及数据交互、云端交互来实现强大的功能。广义穿戴式智能设备包括功能全、尺寸大、可不依赖智能手机实现完整或者部分的功能,例如:智能手表或智能眼镜等,以及只专注于某一类应用功能,需要和其它设备如智能手机配合使用,如各类进行体征监测的智能手环、智能首饰等。As an example and not a limitation, in this embodiment of the present application, the terminal device may also be a wearable device. Wearable devices can also be called wearable smart devices. It is a general term for applying wearable technology to intelligently design daily wear and develop wearable devices, such as glasses, gloves, watches, clothing and shoes, etc. A wearable device is a portable device that is worn directly on the body or integrated into the user's clothing or accessories. Wearable devices are not just hardware devices, but also achieve powerful functions through software support, data interaction, and cloud interaction. Broadly defined wearable smart devices include full-featured, large-sized devices that can achieve complete or partial functions without relying on smartphones, such as smart watches or smart glasses, and those that only focus on a certain type of application function and need to cooperate with other devices such as smartphones. Use, such as various types of smart bracelets, smart jewelry, etc. for physical sign monitoring.
在本申请实施例中,网络设备可以是用于与移动设备通信的设备,网络设备可以是WLAN中的接入点(Access Point,AP),GSM或CDMA中的基站(Base Transceiver Station,BTS),也可以是WCDMA中的基站(NodeB,NB),还可以是LTE中的演进型基站(Evolutional Node B,eNB或eNodeB),或者中继站或接入点,或者车载设备、可穿戴设备以及NR网络中的网络设备(gNB)或者未来演进的PLMN网络中的网络设备或者NTN网络中的网络设备等。In the embodiment of this application, the network device may be a device used to communicate with mobile devices. The network device may be an access point (Access Point, AP) in WLAN, or a base station (Base Transceiver Station, BTS) in GSM or CDMA. , or it can be a base station (NodeB, NB) in WCDMA, or an evolutionary base station (Evolutional Node B, eNB or eNodeB) in LTE, or a relay station or access point, or a vehicle-mounted device, a wearable device, and an NR network network equipment (gNB) or network equipment in the future evolved PLMN network or network equipment in the NTN network, etc.
作为示例而非限定,在本申请实施例中,网络设备可以具有移动特性,例如网络设备可以为移动的设备。可选地,网络设备可以为卫星、气球站。例如,卫星可以为低地球轨道(low earth orbit,LEO)卫星、中地球轨道(medium earth orbit,MEO)卫星、地球同步轨道(geostationary earth orbit,GEO)卫星、高椭圆轨道(High Elliptical Orbit,HEO)卫星等。可选地,网络设备还可以为设置在陆地、水域等位置的基站。As an example and not a limitation, in the embodiment of the present application, the network device may have mobile characteristics, for example, the network device may be a mobile device. Optionally, the network device can be a satellite or balloon station. For example, the satellite can be a low earth orbit (LEO) satellite, a medium earth orbit (MEO) satellite, a geosynchronous orbit (geostationary earth orbit, GEO) satellite, a high elliptical orbit (High Elliptical Orbit, HEO) satellite ) satellite, etc. Optionally, the network device may also be a base station installed on land, water, etc.
在本申请实施例中,网络设备可以为小区提供服务,终端设备通过该小区使用的传输资源(例如,频域资源,或者说,频谱资源)与网络设备进行通信,该小区可以是网络设备(例如基站)对应的小区,小区可以属于宏基站,也可以属于小小区(Small cell)对应的基站,这里的小小区可以包括:城市小区(Metro cell)、微小区(Micro cell)、微微小区(Pico cell)、毫微微小区(Femto cell)等,这些小小区具有覆盖范围小、发射功率低的特点,适用于提供高速率的数据传输服务。In this embodiment of the present application, network equipment can provide services for a cell, and terminal equipment communicates with the network equipment through transmission resources (for example, frequency domain resources, or spectrum resources) used by the cell. The cell can be a network equipment ( For example, the cell corresponding to the base station), the cell can belong to the macro base station, or it can belong to the base station corresponding to the small cell (Small cell). The small cell here can include: urban cell (Metro cell), micro cell (Micro cell), pico cell ( Pico cell), femto cell (Femto cell), etc. These small cells have the characteristics of small coverage and low transmission power, and are suitable for providing high-rate data transmission services.
图1示例性地示出了一种通信系统100。该通信系统包括一个网络设备110和两个终端设备120。在一种可能的实现方式中,该通信系统100可以包括多个网络设备110,并且每个网络设备110的覆盖范围内可以包括其它数量的终端设备120,本申请实施例对此不做限定。Figure 1 illustrates a communication system 100. The communication system includes a network device 110 and two terminal devices 120. In a possible implementation, the communication system 100 may include multiple network devices 110 , and the coverage of each network device 110 may include other numbers of terminal devices 120 , which is not limited in this embodiment of the present application.
在一种可能的实现方式中,该通信系统100还可以包括移动性管理实体(Mobility Management Entity,MME)、接入与移动性管理功能(Access and Mobility Management Function,AMF)等其他网络实体,本申请实施例对此不作限定。In a possible implementation, the communication system 100 may also include other network entities such as a Mobility Management Entity (MME), an Access and Mobility Management Function (AMF), etc. The application examples do not limit this.
其中,网络设备又可以包括接入网设备和核心网设备。即无线通信系统还包括用于与 接入网设备进行通信的多个核心网。接入网设备可以是长期演进(long-term evolution,LTE)系统、下一代(移动通信系统)(next radio,NR)系统或者授权辅助接入长期演进(authorized auxiliary access long-term evolution,LAA-LTE)系统中的演进型基站(evolutional node B,简称可以为eNB或e-NodeB)宏基站、微基站(也称为“小基站”)、微微基站、接入站点(access point,AP)、传输站点(transmission point,TP)或新一代基站(new generation Node B,gNodeB)等。Among them, network equipment may include access network equipment and core network equipment. That is, the wireless communication system also includes multiple core networks used to communicate with access network equipment. The access network equipment can be a long-term evolution (long-term evolution, LTE) system, a next-generation (mobile communication system) (next radio, NR) system or authorized auxiliary access long-term evolution (LAA- Evolutionary base station (evolutional node B, abbreviated as eNB or e-NodeB) macro base station, micro base station (also known as "small base station"), pico base station, access point (access point, AP), Transmission point (TP) or new generation base station (new generation Node B, gNodeB), etc.
应理解,本申请实施例中网络/系统中具有通信功能的设备可称为通信设备。以图1示出的通信系统为例,通信设备可包括具有通信功能的网络设备和终端设备,网络设备和终端设备可以为本申请实施例中的具体设备,此处不再赘述;通信设备还可包括通信系统中的其他设备,例如网络控制器、移动管理实体等其他网络实体,本申请实施例中对此不做限定。It should be understood that in the embodiments of this application, devices with communication functions in the network/system may be called communication devices. Taking the communication system shown in Figure 1 as an example, the communication equipment may include network equipment and terminal equipment with communication functions. The network equipment and terminal equipment may be specific equipment in the embodiments of the present application, which will not be described again here; the communication equipment also It may include other devices in the communication system, such as network controllers, mobility management entities and other network entities, which are not limited in the embodiments of this application.
应理解,本文中术语“系统”和“网络”在本文中常被可互换使用。本文中术语“和/或”,仅仅是一种描述关联对象的关联关系,表示可以存在三种关系,例如,A和/或B,可以表示:单独存在A,同时存在A和B,单独存在B这三种情况。另外,本文中字符“/”,一般表示前后关联对象是一种“或”的关系。It should be understood that the terms "system" and "network" are often used interchangeably herein. The term "and/or" in this article is just an association relationship that describes related objects, indicating that three relationships can exist. For example, A and/or B can mean: A exists alone, A and B exist simultaneously, and they exist alone. B these three situations. In addition, the character "/" in this article generally indicates that the related objects are an "or" relationship.
应理解,在本申请的实施例中提到的“指示”可以是直接指示,也可以是间接指示,还可以是表示具有关联关系。举例说明,A指示B,可以表示A直接指示B,例如B可以通过A获取;也可以表示A间接指示B,例如A指示C,B可以通过C获取;还可以表示A和B之间具有关联关系。It should be understood that the "instruction" mentioned in the embodiments of this application may be a direct instruction, an indirect instruction, or an association relationship. For example, A indicates B, which can mean that A directly indicates B, for example, B can be obtained through A; it can also mean that A indirectly indicates B, for example, A indicates C, and B can be obtained through C; it can also mean that there is an association between A and B. relation.
在本申请实施例的描述中,术语“对应”可表示两者之间具有直接对应或间接对应的关系,也可以表示两者之间具有关联关系,也可以是指示与被指示、配置与被配置等关系。In the description of the embodiments of this application, the term "correspondence" can mean that there is a direct correspondence or indirect correspondence between the two, it can also mean that there is an associated relationship between the two, or it can mean indicating and being instructed, configuration and being. Configuration and other relationships.
为便于理解本申请实施例的技术方案,以下对本申请实施例的相关技术进行说明,以下相关技术作为可选方案与本申请实施例的技术方案可以进行任意结合,其均属于本申请实施例的保护范围。In order to facilitate understanding of the technical solutions of the embodiments of the present application, the relevant technologies of the embodiments of the present application are described below. The following related technologies can be optionally combined with the technical solutions of the embodiments of the present application, and they all belong to the embodiments of the present application. protected range.
这里,在对本申请实施例进行说明之前,先对本申请实施例所涉及的概念进行说明;具体地:Here, before describing the embodiments of the present application, the concepts involved in the embodiments of the present application will be described first; specifically:
第一,预配置测量间隔(pre-configured Measurement Gap,pre-MG);First, pre-configured measurement gap (pre-MG);
NR引入pre-MG的主要原因是当UE工作在不同的带宽分段(Bandwidth Part,BWP)时,对于同步信号块(Synchronization Signal and PBCH Block,SSB)测量,即使是同一个测量对象在不同的BWP,也可能存在不同的测量需求。如图2所示,当UE工作在BWP1的情况下,也即UE激活BWP1,SSB的频域范围完全包含在激活的BWP1的频域范围内,且子载波间隔(Sub-Carrier Space,SCS)/循环前缀(Cyclic Prefix,CP)相同,此时,无需MG即可完成SSB的测量。而当UE从BWP1切换到(switch)BWP2后,SSB的频域范围不在BWP2的频域范围内,也即SSB未包含在UE激活的BWP2中,此时,需要MG,即在MG内才能进行SSB的测量。这里,BWP的切换有多种方式,比如,定时器(timer)或下行控制信息(Downlink Control Information,DCI)等可以快速完成BWP的切换。The main reason why NR introduces pre-MG is that when the UE works in different bandwidth segments (Bandwidth Part, BWP), for synchronization signal block (Synchronization Signal and PBCH Block, SSB) measurement, even if the same measurement object is measured in different BWP, there may also be different measurement needs. As shown in Figure 2, when the UE works in BWP1, that is, the UE activates BWP1, the frequency domain range of SSB is completely included in the frequency domain range of activated BWP1, and the sub-carrier space (Sub-Carrier Space, SCS) /Cyclic Prefix (CP) is the same. At this time, SSB measurement can be completed without MG. When the UE switches from BWP1 to (switch) BWP2, the frequency domain range of SSB is not within the frequency domain range of BWP2, that is, the SSB is not included in the BWP2 activated by the UE. At this time, the MG is required, that is, it can be performed within the MG. Measurement of SSB. Here, there are many ways to switch BWP. For example, timer (timer) or downlink control information (Downlink Control Information, DCI) can quickly complete BWP switching.
具体地,以对SSB进行测量为例。无论是同频测量还是异频测量,对SSB进行测量 时,是否需要MG的其中一个判断条件是:SSB所在频域范围是否在UE当前激活的BWP的频域范围内;因此,随着BWP切换,SSB测量对MG的需求也会有所变化。Specifically, take measurement of SSB as an example. Whether it is same-frequency measurement or inter-frequency measurement, when measuring SSB, one of the judgment conditions for whether an MG is required is: whether the frequency domain range of the SSB is within the frequency domain range of the BWP currently activated by the UE; therefore, with the BWP switching , the demand for MG for SSB measurement will also change.
进一步地,以对CSI-RS进行测量为例。现有协议中,同频测量均不需要MG,而异频测量均需要MG。而且,相关协议中的定位参考信号(Positioning Reference Signal,PRS)测量也均需要MG。Further, taking measurement of CSI-RS as an example. In the existing protocol, the same-frequency measurement does not require the MG, while the inter-frequency measurement requires the MG. Moreover, positioning reference signal (Positioning Reference Signal, PRS) measurements in related protocols also require MG.
这里,pre-MG也可以用于异频CSI-RS测量以及PRS测量,但是需要pre-MG总是处于激活状态,并不能随着BWP切换而动态改变。比如,当UE需要进行异频CSI-RS测量或者PRS测量时,网络设备可以选择配置普通的MG(也即Rel-16中所涉及的MG),或者配置pre-MG总是处于激活状态。Here, pre-MG can also be used for inter-frequency CSI-RS measurement and PRS measurement, but pre-MG needs to be always active and cannot dynamically change with BWP switching. For example, when the UE needs to perform inter-frequency CSI-RS measurement or PRS measurement, the network device can choose to configure a common MG (that is, the MG involved in Rel-16), or configure the pre-MG to always be active.
相关协议中MG的配置和释放是需要通过无线资源控制(Radio Resource Control,RRC)信令来完成的,时延比较大。因此,为了让MG的配置能随着BWP的切换而自适应地调整,对MG进行增强,即引入pre-MG,这样,便于考虑随着BWP切换来激活/去激活pre-MG的机制。The configuration and release of MG in related protocols need to be completed through Radio Resource Control (RRC) signaling, and the delay is relatively large. Therefore, in order to allow the configuration of the MG to be adaptively adjusted with the switching of the BWP, the MG is enhanced, that is, the pre-MG is introduced. In this way, it is convenient to consider the mechanism of activating/deactivating the pre-MG with the switching of the BWP.
需要说明的是,针对每个UE,也即per-UE预配置一个pre-MG,或者,针对每个频率范围(Frequency Range,FR),也即per-FR预配置一个pre-MG,而BWP切换改变对应的pre-MG的状态,如激活状态或去激活状态。这样,便于与现有MG(也即以上所述的普通的MG)配置结构更吻合,而且,对系统影响比较小;基于此。在Rel-17的后续讨论中只考虑了per-UE预配置一个pre-MG,或者,per-FR预配置一个pre-MG的方案。It should be noted that a pre-MG is pre-configured for each UE, that is, per-UE, or a pre-MG is pre-configured for each frequency range (Frequency Range, FR), that is, per-FR, and BWP Switching changes the status of the corresponding pre-MG, such as activation status or deactivation status. In this way, it is more consistent with the configuration structure of the existing MG (that is, the ordinary MG mentioned above), and has a relatively small impact on the system; based on this. In the subsequent discussion of Rel-17, only the solution of per-UE pre-configuring a pre-MG, or per-FR pre-configuring a pre-MG was considered.
第二,带宽分段(Bandwidth Part,BWP)Second, bandwidth segment (Bandwidth Part, BWP)
BWP的核心是定义一个比小区系统带宽和终端带宽能力更小的接入带宽。终端的收发操作均在这个BWP内进行,从而实现更灵活、更高效、能耗更低的终端操作。而且,BWP的配置采用“RRC配置+DCI/timer激活”的两层信令机制。实际应用中,在RRC建立之前,UE无法获取RRC信令所配置的BWP。但UE又需要在一定的带宽范围内来确定搜索空间并监听所需的系统消息,如系统信息块(System Information Block,SIB)消息和寻呼(Paging)消息。The core of BWP is to define an access bandwidth smaller than the cell system bandwidth and terminal bandwidth capabilities. The terminal's sending and receiving operations are all performed within this BWP, thereby achieving more flexible, more efficient, and lower energy consumption terminal operations. Moreover, the BWP configuration adopts the two-layer signaling mechanism of "RRC configuration + DCI/timer activation". In actual applications, before RRC is established, the UE cannot obtain the BWP configured in RRC signaling. However, the UE needs to determine the search space and monitor the required system messages within a certain bandwidth range, such as System Information Block (SIB) messages and paging (Paging) messages.
对于主蜂窝小区(PCell)来说,针对RRC建立之前无法通过RRC信令来配置BWP的情况,新增了初始BWP(initial BWP)的概念。一种方法是将主系统模块(Master Information Block,MIB)中指示的一组数据资源,如CORESET#0的带宽确定为初始下行BWP(initial DL BWP)。另一种方法是通过SIB消息中的SIB1信息单独配置一个initial DL BWP,这主要是由于相关技术发现在某些场景下需要比CORESET#0的带宽(最多96RB)更大的BWP。而且,考虑到UE节能,在某些情况下,UE会回落到initial DL BWP。例如当BWP对应的timer超时,且没有配置下行缺省BWP的情况下,UE会回落的initial DL BWP。这里,缺省BWP是网络设备为终端设备所配置的BWP中得一个,如果没有明确指示,initial BWP即作为缺省BWP。For the primary cell (PCell), in view of the situation that BWP cannot be configured through RRC signaling before RRC is established, the concept of initial BWP (initial BWP) is added. One method is to determine the bandwidth of a set of data resources indicated in the master system module (Master Information Block, MIB), such as CORESET#0, as the initial downlink BWP (initial DL BWP). Another method is to separately configure an initial DL BWP through the SIB1 information in the SIB message. This is mainly due to the fact that related technologies find that a larger BWP than the bandwidth of CORESET#0 (up to 96RB) is required in some scenarios. Moreover, considering UE energy saving, in some cases, UE will fall back to initial DL BWP. For example, when the timer corresponding to BWP times out and the downlink default BWP is not configured, the UE will fall back to the initial DL BWP. Here, the default BWP is one of the BWPs configured by the network device for the terminal device. If there is no explicit instruction, the initial BWP will be used as the default BWP.
对于辅蜂窝小区(SCell)来说,考虑UE的节能需求可以将其中一个BWP配置为休眠BWP(dormant BWP),休眠BWP上不配置物理下行控制信道(Physical Downlink Control Channel,PDCCH)检测。这样当辅小区(也即载波)切换到休眠BWP时,整个该休眠BWP 所对应的载波就会进入休眠状态。相比于SCell去激活,休眠载波状态下UE需要执行一些RRM测量和信道质量指示(Channel Quality Indication,CQI)测量等,用于载波唤醒之后的数据调度等。For the secondary cell (SCell), considering the energy saving requirements of the UE, one of the BWPs can be configured as a dormant BWP (dormant BWP). Physical Downlink Control Channel (PDCCH) detection is not configured on the dormant BWP. In this way, when the secondary cell (that is, the carrier) is switched to the dormant BWP, the entire carrier corresponding to the dormant BWP will enter the dormant state. Compared with SCell deactivation, the UE needs to perform some RRM measurements and Channel Quality Indication (CQI) measurements in the dormant carrier state for data scheduling after carrier wake-up.
具体地,对于当UE切换到initial DL BWP的情况下,所述UE侧确定MG的状态的方案具体如下:Specifically, when the UE switches to initial DL BWP, the UE side determines the status of the MG as follows:
图3是根据本申请一实施例的通信方法的示意性流程图一。该方法可选地可以应用于图1所示的系统,但并不仅限于此。该方法包括以下内容的至少部分内容。Figure 3 is a schematic flowchart 1 of a communication method according to an embodiment of the present application. This method can optionally be applied to the system shown in Figure 1, but is not limited thereto. The method includes at least part of the following.
S310、终端设备切换到初始下行DL带宽分段BWP的情况下,确定测量间隔MG的状态,所述MG的状态为激活状态或去激活状态。S310. When the terminal device switches to the initial downlink DL bandwidth segment BWP, determine the state of the measurement interval MG, and the state of the MG is an activated state or a deactivated state.
这里,所述初始DL BWP为PCell所对应的BWP,也即网络设备为PCell所配置的。Here, the initial DL BWP is the BWP corresponding to PCell, that is, the network device is configured for PCell.
在一具体示例中,所述MG为预配置测量间隔pre-MG;所述pre-MG是对MG增强后所得;这里,所述pre-MG的状态(如激活状态或去激活状态)会随着BWP切换而改变。在另一具体示例中,所述MG还可以为通过如RRC信令等配置的网络控制小间隔(Network control small gap,NCSG)。优选的,本实施例提供的方案尤其适用于所述MG为pre-MG的场景。也即S310具体为:终端设备切换到初始DL BWP的情况下,确定pre-MG的状态,所述pre-MG的状态为激活状态或去激活状态。In a specific example, the MG is a pre-configured measurement interval pre-MG; the pre-MG is obtained by enhancing the MG; here, the state of the pre-MG (such as activation state or deactivation state) will change with Changes when BWP switches. In another specific example, the MG may also be a Network control small gap (NCSG) configured through RRC signaling, etc. Preferably, the solution provided by this embodiment is particularly suitable for the scenario where the MG is a pre-MG. That is to say, S310 is specifically: when the terminal device switches to the initial DL BWP, determine the state of the pre-MG, and the state of the pre-MG is an activated state or a deactivated state.
需要说明的是,实际应用中,所述终端设备只有在成功切换到初始DL BWP的情况下(该示例中,将成功切换到初始DL BWP的时机称为成功切换时机),才需要去确认MG的状态。而确认MG的状态的时机(该示例中,简称状态确定时机,比如,在终端设备切换至初始DL BWP的时刻,或者,在终端设备切换至初始DL BWP之后的任意时刻),与配置完成MG的状态(该配置可以在终端设备侧进行,或在网络设备侧,此处对具体的配置端不作限制)的时机(该示例中,将配置完成MG的状态的时机简称为配置完成时机)可以不同,只要在终端设备需要确认MG的状态之前,MG的状态的配置完成即可。实际应用中,还可能出现终端设备需要确认MG的状态的时候但尚未配置完成的情况,此时,终端设备需要等待MG的状态的配置,如此,在配置完成后,终端设备再去确认MG的状态。It should be noted that in actual applications, the terminal device only needs to confirm the MG when it successfully switches to the initial DL BWP (in this example, the timing of successfully switching to the initial DL BWP is called the successful switching timing). status. The timing of confirming the status of the MG (in this example, referred to as the status determination timing, for example, when the terminal device switches to the initial DL BWP, or at any time after the terminal device switches to the initial DL BWP), is different from the configuration of the MG. (This configuration can be performed on the terminal device side, or on the network device side, and there is no restriction on the specific configuration end here) and the timing (in this example, the timing of completing the configuration of the MG status is simply referred to as the configuration completion timing). Different, as long as the configuration of the MG status is completed before the terminal device needs to confirm the MG status. In actual applications, it may also happen that the terminal device needs to confirm the status of the MG but the configuration has not been completed. At this time, the terminal device needs to wait for the configuration of the MG status. In this way, after the configuration is completed, the terminal device then confirms the MG's status. state.
基于上述分析可知存在三个时机,分别为成功切换时机、状态确定时机以及配置完成时机,其中,除成功切换时机早于状态确认时机外,还会存在以下几种情况:Based on the above analysis, it can be seen that there are three timings, namely the timing of successful switching, the timing of status confirmation, and the timing of configuration completion. In addition to the timing of successful switching being earlier than the timing of status confirmation, there are also the following situations:
情况一:配置完成时机早于成功切换时机,此时,由于成功切换时机早于状态确认时机,所以,配置完成时机也必然早于状态确认时机。Scenario 1: The configuration completion time is earlier than the successful switching time. At this time, since the successful switching time is earlier than the status confirmation time, the configuration completion time must also be earlier than the status confirmation time.
情况二:配置完成时机与成功切换时机相同,均早于状态确认时机。Scenario 2: The configuration completion time is the same as the successful switching time, both of which are earlier than the status confirmation time.
情况三:配置完成时机晚于成功切换时机,但早于状态确认时机。Scenario 3: The configuration completion time is later than the successful switching time, but earlier than the status confirmation time.
情况四:配置完成时机晚于状态确认时机,此时,也必然晚于成功切换时机;该情况下,终端设备可能需要等待MG的状态配置完成后,再去确定测量间隔MG的状态。Scenario 4: The configuration completion time is later than the status confirmation time. In this case, it must also be later than the successful switching time. In this case, the terminal device may need to wait for the MG status configuration to be completed before determining the measurement interval MG status.
可以理解的是,本申请方案对上述三种时机的顺序不作具体限定(可以理解的是,除了成功切换时机早于状态确定时机之外,其他时机的顺序不作限制),实际应用中,只要能够实现S310的方案均在本申请方案的保护范围内,这里不作穷举。It can be understood that the solution of this application does not specifically limit the order of the above three timings (it can be understood that, except for the successful switching timing being earlier than the status determination timing, the sequence of other timings is not limited). In practical applications, as long as it can Solutions for implementing S310 are all within the protection scope of this application solution, and are not exhaustive here.
值得注意的是,本申请方案所述的MG均可以替换为pre-MG。下述内容以MG为例进行说明,针对pre-MG的示例不再赘述。It is worth noting that the MG described in the solution of this application can be replaced by pre-MG. The following content uses MG as an example to illustrate, and the pre-MG example will not be described again.
本申请方案中,所述终端设备可以采用如下两种方式来确定MG的状态,具体包括:In this application solution, the terminal device can use the following two methods to determine the status of the MG, specifically including:
针对初始DL BWP方案的终端设备侧的方式一,终端设备自主确定MG的状态;For the first method on the terminal device side of the initial DL BWP solution, the terminal device independently determines the status of the MG;
第一种确定方式:默认或协议规定;所述MG的状态是所述终端设备默认的,或协议规定的。比如,所述终端设备默认所述MG的状态为激活状态,或者所述终端设备默认所述MG的状态为去激活状态。又比如,所述终端设备基于协议规定确定所述MG的状态为激活状态,或者去激活状态。该方式简便,无需额外的信令指示。The first determination method: default or protocol stipulation; the state of the MG is the terminal device's default or protocol stipulation. For example, the terminal device defaults the state of the MG to the activated state, or the terminal device defaults the state of the MG to the deactivated state. For another example, the terminal device determines that the state of the MG is an activated state or a deactivated state based on protocol regulations. This method is simple and requires no additional signaling instructions.
可以理解的是,对于默认方式而言,为便于终端设备与网络设备所确认的MG的状态相同,所述网络设备和终端设备需要预先约定,比如终端设备和网络设备均默认MG的状态为激活状态,或者,均默认MG的状态为去激活状态。对于协议规定方式而言,终端设备和网络设备基于协议所确定的所述MG的状态相同,比如均为激活状态,或者去激活状态。It can be understood that, for the default mode, in order to facilitate the terminal device and the network device to confirm that the MG status is the same, the network device and the terminal device need to agree in advance. For example, the terminal device and the network device both default to the MG status as activated. status, or, the default MG status is deactivated. For the protocol stipulation method, the status of the MG determined by the terminal device and the network device based on the protocol is the same, for example, both are in an activated state or a deactivated state.
可以理解的是,实际应用中还可以采用其他约定方式,本申请方案对此不作限制,只要网络设备和终端设备所确认的MG的状态相同,均在本申请方案的保护范围内,这里不作穷举。It can be understood that other agreement methods can also be used in actual applications. This application solution does not limit this. As long as the status of the MG confirmed by the network device and the terminal device is the same, it is within the protection scope of this application solution. There is no limit here. Lift.
第二种确定方式:判断机制;具体包括:The second determination method: judgment mechanism; specifically includes:
所述MG的状态是基于测量对象与目标载波之间的频域关系确定的;进一步地,所述MG的状态是基于所述频域关系确定是否需要MG确定的;比如,所述MG的状态在基于所述频域关系确定需要MG的情况下为激活状态,所述MG的状态在基于所述频域关系确定不需要MG的情况下为去激活状态。The status of the MG is determined based on the frequency domain relationship between the measurement object and the target carrier; further, the status of the MG is determined based on the frequency domain relationship to determine whether an MG is needed; for example, the status of the MG When it is determined that an MG is required based on the frequency domain relationship, it is an activated state. When it is determined that an MG is not required based on the frequency domain relationship, the state of the MG is a deactivated state.
需要说明的是,该示例在BWP切换场景下,所以,UE能力和网络指示信息均已确认,基于此,所述MG的状态在UE能力和/或网络指示信息确定的情况下,再基于测量对象与目标载波之间的频域关系确定的。It should be noted that this example is in a BWP handover scenario, so the UE capabilities and network indication information have been confirmed. Based on this, when the UE capabilities and/or network indication information are determined, the status of the MG is determined based on measurements. The frequency domain relationship between the object and the target carrier is determined.
举例来说,以SSB测量而言,在满足以下至少之一条件的情况下,SSB同频测量不需要MG:UE通过信令指示同频测量不需要MG(也即UE支持no-gap能力);SSB在激活BWP之内;当前激活BWP是初始BWP。For example, in the case of SSB measurement, if at least one of the following conditions is met, SSB intra-frequency measurement does not require an MG: the UE indicates through signaling that intra-frequency measurement does not require an MG (that is, the UE supports no-gap capability) ; SSB is within the active BWP; the current active BWP is the initial BWP.
基于此,对于SSB同频测量而言,若UE支持no-gap能力以及网络指示信息确认UE使用no-gap能力的情况下,则SSB同频测量不需要MG,此时,所述MG的状态即为去激活状态,无需再基于测量对象与目标载波之间频域关系而确定。否则,若UE不支持no-gap能力,则所述MG的状态需要基于测量对象与目标载波之间的频域关系来确定。Based on this, for SSB co-frequency measurement, if the UE supports no-gap capability and the network indication information confirms that the UE uses no-gap capability, then SSB co-frequency measurement does not require an MG. At this time, the status of the MG That is, it is a deactivated state, and there is no need to determine based on the frequency domain relationship between the measurement object and the target carrier. Otherwise, if the UE does not support no-gap capability, the status of the MG needs to be determined based on the frequency domain relationship between the measurement object and the target carrier.
进一步地,继续以SSB测量而言,在满足以下所有条件的情况下,SSB异频测量不需要MG:UE支持异频测量不需要MG;网络指示允许异频测量不适用MG;SSB在激活BWP之内。Further, continuing with SSB measurement, SSB inter-frequency measurement does not require MG when all the following conditions are met: UE supports inter-frequency measurement without MG; the network indicates that inter-frequency measurement is not applicable to MG; SSB activates BWP within.
基于此,对于SSB异频测量而言,若上述三个条件均满足(包括UE支持异频测量不需要MG),则SSB异频测量不需要MG,此时,所述MG的状态即为去激活状态。若UE不支持异频测量不需要MG的能力,此时,SSB异频测量必然需要MG,则所述MG的状 态为激活状态,也无需基于测量对象与目标载波之间的频域关系来确定。而其余情况下,均需要基于测量对象与目标载波之间的频域关系来确定。Based on this, for SSB inter-frequency measurement, if the above three conditions are met (including that the UE supports inter-frequency measurement and does not require an MG), then the SSB inter-frequency measurement does not require an MG. At this time, the state of the MG is deactivated. Activation status. If the UE does not support inter-frequency measurement and does not require the MG capability, at this time, SSB inter-frequency measurement must require the MG, and the state of the MG is the active state and does not need to be determined based on the frequency domain relationship between the measurement object and the target carrier. . In other cases, it needs to be determined based on the frequency domain relationship between the measurement object and the target carrier.
可以理解的是,以上仅是示例性说明,还可能有其他情况,此处不作穷举。It can be understood that the above is only an illustrative description, and there may be other situations, which are not exhaustive here.
也就是说,在UE能力和/或网络指示信息确定的情况下,所述终端设备还可以基于测量对象与目标载波之间的频域关系确定MG的状态;进一步地,所述终端设备基于所述频域关系确定是否需要MG,再基于是否需要MG确定所述MG的状态,比如,所述终端设备基于所述频域关系确定需要MG的情况下,确定所述MG的状态为激活状态;所述终端设备基于所述频域关系确定不需要MG的情况下,确定所述MG的状态为去激活状态。That is to say, when the UE capability and/or network indication information is determined, the terminal device can also determine the status of the MG based on the frequency domain relationship between the measurement object and the target carrier; further, the terminal device can determine the status of the MG based on the frequency domain relationship between the measurement object and the target carrier. The frequency domain relationship determines whether an MG is needed, and then determines the state of the MG based on whether the MG is needed. For example, when the terminal device determines that an MG is needed based on the frequency domain relationship, it determines that the state of the MG is an active state; When the terminal device determines that the MG is not needed based on the frequency domain relationship, it determines that the state of the MG is a deactivated state.
可以理解是,该示例中,所述目标载波为网络设备为所述终端设备配置的载波,比如,为网络设备为所述终端设备配置的载波中的至少部分载波。在一具体示例中,所述目标载波为网络设备为所述终端设备配置的所有载波。It can be understood that in this example, the target carrier is a carrier configured by the network device for the terminal device, for example, it is at least part of the carriers configured by the network device for the terminal device. In a specific example, the target carriers are all carriers configured by the network device for the terminal device.
需要说明的是,所述的测量对象与目标载波之间的频域关系可以具体为以下关系中的至少一种:It should be noted that the frequency domain relationship between the measurement object and the target carrier may be specifically at least one of the following relationships:
第一种频域关系:测量对象对应的频域范围,与目标载波的频域范围之间的频域关系。此时,所述目标载波为去激活载波或休眠载波,所述目标载波的频域范围指目标载波的整个频域范围。The first frequency domain relationship: the frequency domain relationship between the frequency domain range corresponding to the measurement object and the frequency domain range of the target carrier. At this time, the target carrier is a deactivated carrier or a dormant carrier, and the frequency domain range of the target carrier refers to the entire frequency domain range of the target carrier.
第二种频域关系:测量对象对应的频域范围,与目标载波中激活BWP所对应的频域范围之间的频域关系。The second frequency domain relationship: the frequency domain relationship between the frequency domain range corresponding to the measurement object and the frequency domain range corresponding to the activated BWP in the target carrier.
第三种频域关系:测量对象对应的频域范围,与目标载波中所配置的任意一个或多个BWP所对应的频域范围之间的频域关系。此时,所述目标载波为休眠载波。The third frequency domain relationship: the frequency domain relationship between the frequency domain range corresponding to the measurement object and the frequency domain range corresponding to any one or more BWPs configured in the target carrier. At this time, the target carrier is a dormant carrier.
基于此,所述目标载波对应的频域范围可以为:目标载波自身的频域范围(也即目标载波的整个频域范围),或者目标载波中激活BWP对应的频域范围,或者,目标载波所配置的一个BWP所对应的频域范围,或者,目标载波所配置的多个(两个或两个以上)BWP所对应的频域范围的组合。为便于描述,下述以目标载波对应的频域范围来指以上所述的任意一种可能。Based on this, the frequency domain range corresponding to the target carrier can be: the frequency domain range of the target carrier itself (that is, the entire frequency domain range of the target carrier), or the frequency domain range corresponding to the activated BWP in the target carrier, or the target carrier The frequency domain range corresponding to one configured BWP, or a combination of frequency domain ranges corresponding to multiple (two or more) BWPs configured for the target carrier. For the convenience of description, any of the above possibilities are referred to below in terms of the frequency domain range corresponding to the target carrier.
进一步地,该示例中,在测量对象对应的频域范围在所述目标载波对应的频域范围内的情况下,不需要MG;此时,终端设备可以确定MG的状态为去激活状态。否则,在测量对象对应的频域范围不在所述目标载波所对应的频域范围内的情况下,则需要MG;此时,终端设备可以确定MG的状态为激活状态。Further, in this example, when the frequency domain range corresponding to the measurement object is within the frequency domain range corresponding to the target carrier, the MG is not required; at this time, the terminal device can determine that the state of the MG is a deactivated state. Otherwise, when the frequency domain range corresponding to the measurement object is not within the frequency domain range corresponding to the target carrier, an MG is required; at this time, the terminal device can determine that the state of the MG is an active state.
这里,可以理解的是,测量对象对应的频域范围在目标载波对应的至少一个频域范围,如目标载波的频域范围,或目标载波中激活BWP所对应的频域范围内等,则可确认不需要MG。相应的,测量对象对应的频域范围不在目标载波对应的所有频域范围,如,不在目标载波的频域范围内,以及不在目标载波中激活BWP所对应的频域范围内等,则确认需要MG。Here, it can be understood that if the frequency domain range corresponding to the measurement object is at least one frequency domain range corresponding to the target carrier, such as the frequency domain range of the target carrier, or the frequency domain range corresponding to the activated BWP in the target carrier, etc., then it can be Confirm that MG is not required. Correspondingly, if the frequency domain range corresponding to the measurement object is not within all the frequency domain ranges corresponding to the target carrier, for example, it is not within the frequency domain range of the target carrier, and it is not within the frequency domain range corresponding to the activation of BWP in the target carrier, etc., then confirmation is required. MG.
举例来说,网络设备为终端设备配置三个测量对象,每个测量对象均对应一定的频域范围;网络设备为该终端设备配置了4个载波,比如4个载波均为目标载波;或者,该4个载波的其中3个,比如载波1至载波3为目标载波,而载波4所在频域与测量对象所在 频域相隔较远,因而不作为目标载波,本示例对此不作具体限制;以下以4个载波均为目标载波为例进行说明;只有所有测量对象的频域范围均在目标载波(4个载波中的任意一个载波即可)对应的频域范围内,才可认定测量对象对应的频域范围在所述目标载波对应的频域范围;否则,若存在一个或多个测量对象的频域范围不在目标载波对应的频域范围内,则均说明测量对象对应的频域范围不在所述目标载波对应的频域范围内。For example, the network device configures three measurement objects for the terminal device, and each measurement object corresponds to a certain frequency domain range; the network device configures 4 carriers for the terminal device, for example, all 4 carriers are target carriers; or, Three of the four carriers, for example, carrier 1 to carrier 3, are target carriers, and the frequency domain where carrier 4 is located is far away from the frequency domain where the measurement object is located, so they are not used as target carriers. This example does not impose specific restrictions on this; as follows Take 4 carriers as target carriers as an example to illustrate; only when the frequency domain range of all measurement objects is within the frequency domain range corresponding to the target carrier (any one of the 4 carriers is enough), can the measurement object be deemed to correspond to The frequency domain range is within the frequency domain range corresponding to the target carrier; otherwise, if the frequency domain range of one or more measurement objects is not within the frequency domain range corresponding to the target carrier, it means that the frequency domain range corresponding to the measurement object is not Within the frequency domain range corresponding to the target carrier.
比如,测量对象1的频域范围在目标载波1对应的频域范围内,测量对象2和3的频域范围均在目标载波2对应的频域范围内,此时,即可认定测量对象对应的频域范围在所述目标载波对应的频域范围内。反之,测量对象2和3的频域范围均在目标载波2的频域范围内,但测量对象1不在网络设备目标载波1至目标载波4中任意一个目标载波对应的频域范围内,此时,均认为测量对象的频域范围不在所述目标载波对应的频域范围内。For example, the frequency domain range of measurement object 1 is within the frequency domain range corresponding to target carrier 1, and the frequency domain ranges of measurement objects 2 and 3 are both within the frequency domain range corresponding to target carrier 2. At this time, it can be determined that the measurement object corresponds to The frequency domain range is within the frequency domain range corresponding to the target carrier. On the contrary, the frequency domain ranges of measurement objects 2 and 3 are both within the frequency domain range of target carrier 2, but measurement object 1 is not within the frequency domain range corresponding to any of the target carriers from target carrier 1 to target carrier 4 of the network equipment. At this time, , it is considered that the frequency domain range of the measurement object is not within the frequency domain range corresponding to the target carrier.
可以理解的是,对于MG为pre-MG的情况而言,所述pre-MG的状态还可以是基于所述频域关系确定是否需要MG确定的;比如,所述pre-MG的状态在基于所述频域关系确定需要MG的情况下为激活状态,所述pre-MG的状态在基于所述频域关系确定不需要MG的情况下为去激活状态。这里,对于如何确定是否需要MG,可以参照上述示例,此处不再赘述。It can be understood that, for the case where the MG is a pre-MG, the state of the pre-MG can also be determined based on the frequency domain relationship to determine whether the MG is required; for example, the state of the pre-MG is based on The state of the pre-MG is an activated state when it is determined that an MG is required based on the frequency domain relationship, and the state of the pre-MG is a deactivated state when it is determined that an MG is not required based on the frequency domain relationship. Here, as to how to determine whether an MG is required, reference can be made to the above example, which will not be described again here.
针对初始DL BWP方案的终端设备侧的方式二,所述MG的状态由网络设备控制;具体包括:For the second method on the terminal device side of the initial DL BWP solution, the status of the MG is controlled by the network device; specifically including:
所述MG的状态为基于状态指示信息确定的;其中,所述状态指示信息用于指示所述MG的状态为激活状态或去激活状态;具体地,所述状态指示信息用于指示在终端设备切换到所述初始DL BWP的情况下所述MG的状态为激活状态或去激活状态。该方式中,所述终端设备从网络设备接收所述状态指示信息。The status of the MG is determined based on status indication information; wherein the status indication information is used to indicate that the status of the MG is an activated state or a deactivated state; specifically, the status indication information is used to indicate that the terminal device When switching to the initial DL BWP, the state of the MG is the activated state or the deactivated state. In this method, the terminal device receives the status indication information from the network device.
正如以上所述,所述终端设备只有在成功切换到初始DL BWP的情况下,才需要去确认MG的状态。而确认MG的状态的时机,与接收状态指示信息的时机(该示例简称接收时机),以及与成功解析该状态指示信息并解析得到MG的状态的时机(该示例简称解析时机),可能存在如下几种情况:As mentioned above, the terminal device only needs to confirm the status of the MG when it successfully switches to the initial DL BWP. The timing of confirming the status of the MG, the timing of receiving the status indication information (referred to as the receiving timing in this example), and the timing of successfully parsing the status indication information and obtaining the status of the MG (referred to as the parsing timing in this example) may be as follows. Several situations:
第一,接收时机晚于成功切换时机;该情况下,所述终端设备在成功切换到初始DL BWP之后,才接收到所述状态指示信息,进而解析该状态指示信息后确定出MG的状态。First, the reception timing is later than the successful switching timing; in this case, the terminal device receives the status indication information only after successfully switching to the initial DL BWP, and then parses the status indication information to determine the status of the MG.
第二,接收时机早于成功切换时机;该情况下,可能存在解析时机早于状态确认时机的情况,比如,所述终端设备先接收到所述状态指示信息,并解析所述状态指示信息,得到MG的状态,此时,终端设备尚未成功切换到初始DL BWP,所以,终端设备可以暂时存储解析得到的该MG的状态,并在成功切换到初始DL BWP后,再去确定该MG的状态。Second, the reception timing is earlier than the successful switching timing; in this case, there may be a situation where the parsing timing is earlier than the status confirmation timing. For example, the terminal device first receives the status indication information and parses the status indication information, Obtain the status of the MG. At this time, the terminal device has not yet successfully switched to the initial DL BWP. Therefore, the terminal device can temporarily store the parsed status of the MG, and then determine the status of the MG after successfully switching to the initial DL BWP. .
可以理解的是,本申请方案对上述时机不作具体限制,只要能够基于状态指示信息确定出MG的状态的方案均落入本申请方案的保护范围内,这里不作穷举。It can be understood that the solution of this application does not specifically limit the above-mentioned timing. As long as the solution that can determine the status of the MG based on the status indication information falls within the protection scope of the solution of this application, it is not exhaustive here.
这里,在一示例中,所述状态指示信息由系统消息携带。进一步地,所述系统消息还包括:所述初始DL BWP的配置信息。也就是说,所述状态指示信息可以由包含有初始DL BWP的配置信息的系统消息来携带。Here, in an example, the status indication information is carried by a system message. Further, the system message also includes: configuration information of the initial DL BWP. That is to say, the status indication information may be carried by a system message containing the configuration information of the initial DL BWP.
进一步地,在一具体示例中,该状态指示信息由系统消息中的SIB消息携带。实际应用中,所述SIB消息中还可以有SIB1、SIB2、SIB3等,此时,所述状态指示信息可以由所述SIB消息中SIB1、SIB2、SIB3中的任意一个携带。优选的,所述状态指示信息可以由所述SIB1携带;进一步地,所述SIB1还包括初始DL BWP的配置信息。也就是说,所述网络设备在SIB1中配置initial DL BWP的同时,还可以配置激活(ON)/去激活(OFF)指示信息(也即状态指示信息),该ON/OFF指示信息用于指示在终端设备切换到所述initial DL BWP的情况下所述MG的状态为激活状态或去激活状态。这样,通过修改SIB1的信息,即可简便并有效地把initial DL BWP和MG的ON/OFF指示信息关联起来。Further, in a specific example, the status indication information is carried by the SIB message in the system message. In practical applications, the SIB message may also include SIB1, SIB2, SIB3, etc. In this case, the status indication information may be carried by any one of SIB1, SIB2, and SIB3 in the SIB message. Preferably, the status indication information may be carried by the SIB1; further, the SIB1 also includes configuration information of the initial DL BWP. That is to say, while the network device configures the initial DL BWP in SIB1, it can also configure activation (ON)/deactivation (OFF) indication information (that is, status indication information). The ON/OFF indication information is used to indicate When the terminal device switches to the initial DL BWP, the state of the MG is the activated state or the deactivated state. In this way, by modifying the information of SIB1, the initial DL BWP and the ON/OFF indication information of the MG can be associated simply and effectively.
在另一具体示例中,所述状态指示信息由系统消息中的MIB消息携带,此时,所述MIB消息隐式地携带(比如通过MIB消息中的CORESET#0携带)初始DL BWP的配置信息。也就是说,所述网络设备在MIB消息中配置initial DL BWP的同时,还可以配置ON/OFF指示信息(也即状态指示信息),该ON/OFF指示信息用于指示在终端设备切换到所述initial DL BWP的情况下所述MG的状态为激活状态或去激活状态。这样,通过修改MIB消息,即可简便并有效地把initial DL BWP和MG的ON/OFF指示信息关联起来。In another specific example, the status indication information is carried by the MIB message in the system message. At this time, the MIB message implicitly carries (for example, carried by CORESET#0 in the MIB message) the configuration information of the initial DL BWP. . That is to say, while the network device configures the initial DL BWP in the MIB message, it can also configure ON/OFF indication information (that is, status indication information). The ON/OFF indication information is used to indicate when the terminal device switches to the desired state. In the case of the initial DL BWP, the state of the MG is the activated state or the deactivated state. In this way, by modifying the MIB message, the initial DL BWP and the MG's ON/OFF indication information can be associated simply and effectively.
可以理解的是,本申请方案对携带状态指示信息的具体系统消息不作限制,只要能够通过系统消息携带该状态指示信息的方案,均在本申请方案的保护范围内,这里不作穷举。It can be understood that the solution of this application does not limit the specific system messages carrying status indication information. As long as the system message can carry the status indication information, it is within the protection scope of the solution of this application, and is not exhaustive here.
需要说明的是,该方式在实际应用中,UE还未与网络设备建立RRC连接,未完成MG(或pre-MG)相关的能力上报和测量对象(Measuring Object,MO)配置等。基于此,网络设备在配置相应的测量对象时需要考虑已配置好的ON/OFF指示信息。It should be noted that in the actual application of this method, the UE has not yet established an RRC connection with the network device, and has not completed MG (or pre-MG) related capability reporting and measurement object (Measuring Object, MO) configuration. Based on this, the network device needs to consider the configured ON/OFF indication information when configuring the corresponding measurement object.
在另一示例中,所述状态指示信息由RRC信令携带。也就是说,通过RRC信令来配置ON/OFF指示信息(也即状态指示信息)。该示例中,所述RRC信令还包括BWP的配置信息,比如,ON/OFF指示信息放在BWP的配置信息内,即网络设备在RRC信令中配置BWP的配置信息的同时,配置对应的ON/OFF指示信息,该ON/OFF指示信息用于指示在终端设备切换到所述initial DL BWP的情况下所述MG的状态为激活状态或去激活状态。In another example, the status indication information is carried by RRC signaling. That is to say, ON/OFF indication information (that is, status indication information) is configured through RRC signaling. In this example, the RRC signaling also includes BWP configuration information. For example, the ON/OFF indication information is placed in the BWP configuration information. That is, the network device configures the BWP configuration information in the RRC signaling and at the same time configures the corresponding ON/OFF indication information, the ON/OFF indication information is used to indicate that the state of the MG is an activated state or a deactivated state when the terminal device switches to the initial DL BWP.
进一步地,在一具体示例中,所述状态指示信息由所述RRC信令中的服务小区配置(servingCellconfig)信息携带。该示例中,所述RRC信令还包括BWP的配置信息;比如,ON/OFF指示信息置于servingCellconfig信息内新增的信息(或称字段)内。Further, in a specific example, the status indication information is carried by serving cell configuration (servingCellconfig) information in the RRC signaling. In this example, the RRC signaling also includes BWP configuration information; for example, the ON/OFF indication information is placed in the newly added information (or field) in the servingCellconfig information.
举例来说,所述网络设备在servingCellconfig信息内配置BWP的配置信息的同时,新增为初始下行BWP预配置间隔图样(preGapStatueForInitialDownlinkBWP)字段,以配置初始下行BWP对应的ON/OFF指示信息。这里,preGapStatueForInitialDownlinkBWP字段的格式如下:For example, while configuring the BWP configuration information in the servingCellconfig information, the network device adds an initial downlink BWP preconfiguration interval pattern (preGapStatueForInitialDownlinkBWP) field to configure the ON/OFF indication information corresponding to the initial downlink BWP. Here, the format of the preGapStatueForInitialDownlinkBWP field is as follows:
preGapStatueForInitialDownlinkBWP ENUMERATED{ON,OFF}。preGapStatueForInitialDownlinkBWP ENUMERATED{ON,OFF}.
其中,ON表示在终端设备切换到所述initial DL BWP的情况下所述MG的状态为激活状态;OFF表示在终端设备切换到所述initial DL BWP的情况下所述MG的状态为去激活状态。Among them, ON means that the state of the MG is the activated state when the terminal device switches to the initial DL BWP; OFF means that the state of the MG is the deactivated state when the terminal device switches to the initial DL BWP. .
可以理解的是,以上preGapStatueForInitialDownlinkBWP仅为初始下行BWP对应的 状态指示信息的一种示意。实际应用中,该字段可以为其他的格式,例如默认为OFF,或者只有在ON的时候需要网络配置,如:It can be understood that the above preGapStatueForInitialDownlinkBWP is only an indication of the status indication information corresponding to the initial downlink BWP. In actual applications, this field can be in other formats, such as OFF by default, or network configuration is required only when ON, such as:
preGapStatueForInitialDownlinkBWP ON,optional;preGapStatueForInitialDownlinkBWP ON, optional;
又或者,通过一组序列来指示多个BWP对应的MG的状态,该多个BWP对应的MG的状态中一个(如第一个)对应初始下行BWP,如:Alternatively, a set of sequences is used to indicate the status of MGs corresponding to multiple BWPs. One of the statuses of the MGs corresponding to multiple BWPs (such as the first one) corresponds to the initial downlink BWP, such as:
preGapStatueForDownlinkBWP SEQUENCE(SIZE(1..numOfBwp))OF OnOffIndicator。preGapStatueForDownlinkBWP SEQUENCE(SIZE(1..numOfBwp))OF OnOffIndicator.
实际应用中,所述服务小区配置信息中可能还包括如下字段中的至少一个:In practical applications, the serving cell configuration information may also include at least one of the following fields:
下行BWP的释放列表(downlinkBWP-ToReleaseList);Downlink BWP release list (downlinkBWP-ToReleaseList);
下行BWP的增加修改列表(downlinkBWP-ToAddModList);Add modification list of downlink BWP (downlinkBWP-ToAddModList);
BWP的去激活定时器(bwp-InactivityTimer);BWP’s deactivation timer (bwp-InactivityTimer);
默认下行BWP标识(defaultDownlinkBWP-Id)。Default downlink BWP identifier (defaultDownlinkBWP-Id).
可以理解的是,实际应用中,初始下行BWP对应的状态指示信息可以包含在服务小区配置servingCellconfig信息中,或者其他小区级别的配置信息中;进一步的,servingCellconfig可以包含以上BWP的配置信息,或者为RRC信令中,与BWP的配置信息为同一层级的信息,本申请方案对此不作限制,只要小区级别的RRC信令携带有初始下行BWP对应的状态指示信息均在本申请方案的保护范围内,这里不作穷举。It can be understood that in actual applications, the status indication information corresponding to the initial downlink BWP can be included in the serving cell configuration information, servingCellconfig information, or other cell-level configuration information; further, servingCellconfig can include the above BWP configuration information, or for In RRC signaling, the configuration information of BWP is the same level of information. This application solution does not limit this. As long as the cell-level RRC signaling carries status indication information corresponding to the initial downlink BWP, it is within the protection scope of this application solution. , not exhaustive here.
在另一示例中,所述状态指示信息由RRC信令携带。也就是说,通过RRC信令来配置ON/OFF指示信息(也即状态指示信息)。该示例中,所述ON/OFF指示信息可以具体通过载波对应的位图(Bitmap)中的比特表示,该载波对应的位图携带于RRC信令中,此时,所述RRC信令还可以携带BWP的配置信息,本申请方案对RRC所携带的其他信息不作限制,只有RRC信令中携带有载波对应的位图,且该Bitmap中的比特能够表示ON/OFF指示信息,均在本申请方案的包含范围内。In another example, the status indication information is carried by RRC signaling. That is to say, ON/OFF indication information (that is, status indication information) is configured through RRC signaling. In this example, the ON/OFF indication information can be specifically represented by the bits in the bitmap corresponding to the carrier. The bitmap corresponding to the carrier is carried in the RRC signaling. At this time, the RRC signaling can also Carrying BWP configuration information, the solution of this application does not limit other information carried by RRC. Only the RRC signaling carries the bitmap corresponding to the carrier, and the bits in the Bitmap can represent ON/OFF indication information, both of which are included in this application. within the scope of the program.
进一步地,对于ON/OFF指示信息通过载波对应Bitmap中的比特来表示的情况,可以在载波对应的Bitmap中新增一比特,即载波对应的位图中存在一比特表示初始DL BWP的ON/OFF指示信息,剩余比特中的比特用于指示载波对应的其他DL BWP中与该比特对应的DL BWP的相关信息,比如,指示该比特对应的DL BWP的MG的激活状态或激活状态。Further, for the case where the ON/OFF indication information is represented by the bits in the Bitmap corresponding to the carrier, a new bit can be added to the Bitmap corresponding to the carrier, that is, there is a bit in the bitmap corresponding to the carrier to represent the ON/OFF of the initial DL BWP. OFF indication information, the bits in the remaining bits are used to indicate the relevant information of the DL BWP corresponding to the bit in other DL BWPs corresponding to the carrier, for example, indicating the activation status or activation status of the MG of the DL BWP corresponding to the bit.
举例来说,载波对应的DL BWP(也即载波上配置的DL BWP)共N个,此时,该载波对应的Bitmap的长度则为N+1,其中,所述Bitmap中第一比特指示初始DL BWP对应的MG的状态,比如,第一比特为0时,指示为OFF,第一比特为1时,指示为ON;而剩余N个比特中的比特用于指示载波对应的DL BWP中与该比特对应的DL BWP的MG的状态。可以理解的是,以上仅为一具体示例,实际应用中,表示ON/OFF指示信息的比特还可以是Bitmap中的其他比特,本申请方案对此不作限制。For example, there are N DL BWPs corresponding to the carrier (that is, the DL BWP configured on the carrier). At this time, the length of the Bitmap corresponding to the carrier is N+1, where the first bit in the Bitmap indicates the initial The status of the MG corresponding to the DL BWP. For example, when the first bit is 0, the indication is OFF, and when the first bit is 1, the indication is ON; and the remaining N bits are used to indicate the DL BWP corresponding to the carrier. This bit corresponds to the MG status of the DL BWP. It can be understood that the above is only a specific example. In actual applications, the bits representing the ON/OFF indication information can also be other bits in the Bitmap, and the solution of this application is not limited to this.
可以理解的是,以上示例中,UE配置有一个MG,或称UE对应有一个MG,对于UE配置有(或对应有)两个或两个以上的MG而言,可以参照如下示例。It can be understood that in the above example, the UE is configured with one MG, or the UE is configured with (or corresponds to) one MG. If the UE is configured with (or corresponds to) two or more MGs, refer to the following example.
在另一示例中,所述状态指示信息由RRC信令携带,而且,所述状态指示信息用于指 示终端设备切换到初始DL BWP的情况下MG的状态为去激活状态。进一步地,所述状态指示信息由所述RRC信令中的与初始DL BWP对应的去激活MG列表携带,即该去激活MG列表中记录有终端设备切换到初始DL BWP的情况下的MG的唯一标识(ID)。也就是说,该示例中,若与初始DL BWP对应的去激活MG列表中携带MG的唯一标识,则可确认当UE切换到所述初始DL BWP时,该唯一标识对应的MG的状态为去激活状态;而为UE预配置的其他MG,即其他MG ID不在该初始DL BWP对应的去激活MG列表中,则其他MG的状态默认为或协议规定为激活状态。举例来说,网络设备为UE配置有两个MG,唯一标识分别为MG1和MG2;UE接收到RRC信令,并解析得到与该初始DL BWP对应的去激活MG列表中的MG1,此时,即可确认当UE切换到初始DL BWP时,MG1对应的MG的状态为去激活状态,而MG2对应的MG的状态为默认的激活状态。In another example, the status indication information is carried by RRC signaling, and the status indication information is used to indicate that the status of the MG is the deactivation status when the terminal device switches to the initial DL BWP. Further, the status indication information is carried by the deactivated MG list corresponding to the initial DL BWP in the RRC signaling, that is, the deactivated MG list records the MGs when the terminal device switches to the initial DL BWP. Unique identification (ID). That is to say, in this example, if the deactivated MG list corresponding to the initial DL BWP carries the unique identifier of the MG, it can be confirmed that when the UE switches to the initial DL BWP, the status of the MG corresponding to the unique identifier is deactivated. Activated state; while other MGs preconfigured for the UE, that is, other MG IDs are not in the deactivated MG list corresponding to the initial DL BWP, the status of other MGs defaults to the activated state or is stipulated by the protocol. For example, the network device configures two MGs for the UE, and the unique identifiers are MG1 and MG2 respectively; the UE receives the RRC signaling and parses it to obtain MG1 in the deactivated MG list corresponding to the initial DL BWP. At this time, It can be confirmed that when the UE switches to the initial DL BWP, the state of the MG corresponding to MG1 is the deactivated state, and the state of the MG corresponding to MG2 is the default activated state.
这里,所述RRC信令还包括servingCellconfig信息,所述状态指示信息由所述servingCellconfig信息携带,也即该初始DL BWP对应的去激活MG列表还可以在servingCellconfig信息中。举例来说,所述网络设备在servingCellconfig信息内新增为初始DL BWP对应的去激活MG列表(deactivatedMeasGapListForInitialDownlinkBWP)字段,以指示当UE切换到初始DL BWP的情况下,需要将哪些MG去激活。Here, the RRC signaling also includes servingCellconfig information, and the status indication information is carried by the servingCellconfig information. That is, the deactivated MG list corresponding to the initial DL BWP can also be in the servingCellconfig information. For example, the network device adds a deactivated MG list (deactivatedMeasGapListForInitialDownlinkBWP) field corresponding to the initial DL BWP in the servingCellconfig information to indicate which MGs need to be deactivated when the UE switches to the initial DL BWP.
这里,deactivatedMeasGapListForInitialDownlinkBWP字段的格式如下:Here, the format of the deactivatedMeasGapListForInitialDownlinkBWP field is as follows:
deactivatedMeasGapListForInitialDownlinkBWP SEQUENCE(SIZE(1,maxNorfGapId-r17))of MeasGapId-r17,OPTIONAL。deactivatedMeasGapListForInitialDownlinkBWP SEQUENCE(SIZE(1,maxNorfGapId-r17))of MeasGapId-r17,OPTIONAL.
又或者,所述RRC信令还包括BWP的配置信息,此时,所述状态指示信息在所述BWP的配置信息中,也即该初始DL BWP对应的去激活MG列表还可以在所述BWP的配置信息中。或者,所述状态指示信息不在所述BWP的配置信息中。Or, the RRC signaling also includes the configuration information of the BWP. At this time, the status indication information is in the configuration information of the BWP, that is, the deactivated MG list corresponding to the initial DL BWP can also be in the BWP. configuration information. Or, the status indication information is not in the configuration information of the BWP.
又或者,所述RRC信令包括servingCellconfig信息,所述servingCellconfig信息包括BWP的配置信息,此时,所述状态指示信息在所述BWP的配置信息中,也即该初始DL BWP对应的去激活MG列表在所述BWP的配置信息中。也就是说,所述RRC信令的servingCellconfig信息中配置有BWP的配置信息,所述BWP的配置信息配置有初始DL BWP对应的去激活MG列表。Or, the RRC signaling includes servingCellconfig information, and the servingCellconfig information includes the configuration information of the BWP. At this time, the status indication information is in the configuration information of the BWP, that is, the deactivated MG corresponding to the initial DL BWP. The list is in the configuration information of the BWP. That is to say, the servingCellconfig information of the RRC signaling is configured with BWP configuration information, and the BWP configuration information is configured with a deactivated MG list corresponding to the initial DL BWP.
又或者,所述BWP的配置信息还可以不在servingCellconfig信息中,比如,RRC信令中,所述servingCellconfig信息与BWP的配置信息为同一层级的信息等,本申请方案对此不作限制。Alternatively, the BWP configuration information may not be included in the servingCellconfig information. For example, in RRC signaling, the servingCellconfig information and the BWP configuration information are information at the same level, etc. This application solution does not limit this.
需要说明的是,MG的配置信息可以在该去激活MG列表之外,而该去激活MG列表中只记录与BWP(比如,初始DL BWP)关联的MG的唯一标识,此时,只要能够通过MG的唯一标识唯一定位到MG的配置信息即可。It should be noted that the configuration information of the MG can be outside the deactivated MG list, and the deactivated MG list only records the unique identifier of the MG associated with the BWP (for example, the initial DL BWP). At this time, as long as it can pass The unique identifier of the MG can uniquely locate the configuration information of the MG.
可以理解的是,以上仅为一具体示例,实际应用中,只要RRC信令中包含该去激活MG列表,且该去激活MG列表中记录有本申请方案所述的初始DL BWP对应的MG的唯一标识,均属于本申请方案的保护范围。It can be understood that the above is only a specific example. In practical applications, as long as the deactivated MG list is included in the RRC signaling, and the deactivated MG list records the MG corresponding to the initial DL BWP described in the solution of this application. Unique identifiers all fall within the scope of protection of this application plan.
需要说明的是,UE默认或基于协议规定确定MG的状态的方式,与网络设备配置MG的状态方式,可以结合使用,此时,以网络设备配置为主来确定MG的状态。举例来说, 在一示例中,在终端设备切换到初始DL BWP的情况下所述MG的状态默认或基于协议规定为激活状态,此时,若网络设备在RRC信令的去激活MG列表中配置有该初始DL BWP对应的MG,则UE在接收到该RRC信令后,即可确定在终端设备切换到初始DL BWP的情况下所述初始DL BWP对应的MG的状态为去激活状态。否则,若网络设备未配置该初始DL BWP对应的去激活MG列表,则在终端设备切换到初始DL BWP的情况下所述MG的状态为激活状态。It should be noted that the way in which the UE determines the status of the MG by default or based on protocol regulations can be used in combination with the way in which the network device configures the status of the MG. In this case, the configuration of the network device is mainly used to determine the status of the MG. For example, in an example, when the terminal device switches to the initial DL BWP, the state of the MG is activated by default or based on protocol regulations. At this time, if the network device is in the deactivated MG list of RRC signaling If the MG corresponding to the initial DL BWP is configured, after receiving the RRC signaling, the UE can determine that the status of the MG corresponding to the initial DL BWP is the deactivated state when the terminal device switches to the initial DL BWP. Otherwise, if the network device does not configure the deactivated MG list corresponding to the initial DL BWP, then the status of the MG is the activated state when the terminal device switches to the initial DL BWP.
这里,对于当UE切换到initial DL BWP的情况下,所述网络设备侧的方案具体如下:Here, when the UE switches to initial DL BWP, the solution on the network device side is as follows:
图4是根据本申请一实施例的通信方法的示意性流程图二。该方法可选地可以应用于图1所示的系统,但并不仅限于此。该方法包括以下内容的至少部分内容。Figure 4 is a schematic flowchart 2 of a communication method according to an embodiment of the present application. This method can optionally be applied to the system shown in Figure 1, but is not limited thereto. The method includes at least part of the following.
S410,网络设备确定在终端设备切换到初始下行DL带宽分段BWP的情况下测量间隔MG的状态,所述MG的状态为激活状态或去激活状态。S410: The network device determines the state of the measurement interval MG when the terminal device switches to the initial downlink DL bandwidth segment BWP, and the state of the MG is an activated state or a deactivated state.
这里,所述初始DL BWP为PCell所对应的BWP,也即网络设备为PCell所配置的。Here, the initial DL BWP is the BWP corresponding to PCell, that is, the network device is configured for PCell.
在一具体示例中,所述MG为预配置测量间隔pre-MG;所述pre-MG是对MG增强后所得。这里,所述pre-MG的状态(如激活状态或去激活状态)会随着BWP切换而改变。在另一具体示例中,所述MG还可以为通过如RRC信令等配置的网络控制小间隔(Network control small gap,NCSG)。优选的,本实施例提供的方案尤其适用于所述MG为pre-MG的场景。也即S410具体为:网络设备确定在终端设备切换到初始DL BWP的情况下所述pre-MG的状态,所述pre-MG的状态为激活状态或去激活状态。In a specific example, the MG is a preconfigured measurement interval pre-MG; the pre-MG is obtained by enhancing the MG. Here, the state of the pre-MG (such as activation state or deactivation state) will change with BWP switching. In another specific example, the MG may also be a Network control small gap (NCSG) configured through RRC signaling, etc. Preferably, the solution provided by this embodiment is particularly suitable for the scenario where the MG is a pre-MG. That is, S410 is specifically: the network device determines the state of the pre-MG when the terminal device switches to the initial DL BWP, and the state of the pre-MG is an activated state or a deactivated state.
该示例中,存在几种时机,分别为:网络设备确定MG的状态的时机(该示例称为网络确认时机),网络设备配置MG的状态的时机(该示例称为网络配置时机),以及终端设备切换到初始DL BWP的时机(该示例称为成功切换时机);基于此,存在如下情况:In this example, there are several timings, namely: the timing when the network device determines the status of the MG (this example is called the network confirmation timing), the timing when the network device configures the status of the MG (this example is called the network configuration timing), and the terminal The timing of the device switching to the initial DL BWP (this example is called the timing of successful switching); based on this, the following situations exist:
网络配置时机早于网络确认时机;该情况下,成功切换时机可能早于网络配置时机,或者,成功切换时机晚于网络确认时机,或者,成功切换时机处于网络配置时机与网络确认时机之间。The network configuration timing is earlier than the network confirmation timing; in this case, the successful switching timing may be earlier than the network configuration timing, or the successful switching timing may be later than the network confirmation timing, or the successful switching timing may be between the network configuration timing and the network confirmation timing.
可以理解的是,本申请方案对上述三种时机的顺序不作具体限定,实际应用中,只要能够实现S410的方案均在本申请方案的保护范围内,这里不作穷举。It can be understood that the solution of this application does not specifically limit the order of the above three opportunities. In practical applications, as long as the solution can realize S410, it is within the protection scope of the solution of this application, and is not exhaustive here.
本申请方案中,所述网络设备可以采用如下两种方式来确定MG的状态,具体包括:In this application solution, the network device can use the following two methods to determine the status of the MG, specifically including:
针对初始DL BWP方案的网络设备侧的方式一:网络设备与终端设备约定确认方式;Method 1 for the network equipment side of the initial DL BWP solution: Network equipment and terminal equipment agree on the confirmation method;
第一种确认方式:默认或协议规定;所述MG的状态为网络设备默认的,或者协议规定的。比如,所述网络设备默认所述MG的状态为激活状态,或者所述网络设备默认所述MG的状态为去激活状态。又比如,所述网络设备基于协议规定确定所述MG的状态为激活状态,或者去激活状态。该方式简便,无需额外的信令指示。The first confirmation method: default or protocol stipulation; the status of the MG is the network device's default or protocol stipulation. For example, the network device defaults the state of the MG to the activated state, or the network device defaults the state of the MG to the deactivated state. For another example, the network device determines that the state of the MG is an activated state or a deactivated state based on protocol regulations. This method is simple and requires no additional signaling instructions.
可以理解的是,对于默认方式而言,为便于终端设备与网络设备所确认的MG的状态相同,所述网络设备和终端设备需要预先约定,比如终端设备和网络设备均默认MG的状态为激活状态,或者,均默认MG的状态为去激活状态。对于协议规定方式而言,终端设备和网络设备基于协议所确定的所述MG的状态相同,比如均为激活状态,或者去激活状态。It can be understood that, for the default mode, in order to facilitate the terminal device and the network device to confirm that the MG status is the same, the network device and the terminal device need to agree in advance. For example, the terminal device and the network device both default to the MG status as activated. status, or, the default MG status is deactivated. For the protocol stipulation method, the status of the MG determined by the terminal device and the network device based on the protocol is the same, for example, both are in an activated state or a deactivated state.
可以理解的是,实际应用中还可以采用其他约定方式,本申请方案对此不作限制,只要网络设备和终端设备所确认的MG的状态相同,均在本申请方案的保护范围内,这里不作穷举。It can be understood that other agreement methods can also be used in actual applications. This application solution does not limit this. As long as the status of the MG confirmed by the network device and the terminal device is the same, it is within the protection scope of this application solution. There is no limit here. Lift.
第二种确认方式:判断机制;具体包括:The second confirmation method: judgment mechanism; specifically includes:
所述MG的状态是基于测量对象与目标载波之间的频域关系确定的;进一步地,所述MG的状态是基于所述频域关系确定是否需要MG确定的;比如,所述MG的状态在基于所述频域关系确定需要MG的情况下为激活状态,所述MG的状态在基于所述频域关系确定不需要MG的情况下为去激活状态。The status of the MG is determined based on the frequency domain relationship between the measurement object and the target carrier; further, the status of the MG is determined based on the frequency domain relationship to determine whether an MG is needed; for example, the status of the MG When it is determined that an MG is required based on the frequency domain relationship, it is an activated state. When it is determined that an MG is not required based on the frequency domain relationship, the state of the MG is a deactivated state.
需要说明的是,该示例在BWP切换场景下,所以,UE能力和网络指示信息均已确认,基于此,所述MG的状态在UE能力和/或网络指示信息确定的情况下,再基于测量对象与目标载波之间的频域关系确定的。It should be noted that this example is in a BWP handover scenario, so the UE capabilities and network indication information have been confirmed. Based on this, when the UE capabilities and/or network indication information are determined, the status of the MG is determined based on measurements. The frequency domain relationship between the object and the target carrier is determined.
举例来说,以SSB测量而言,在满足以下至少之一条件的情况下,SSB同频测量不需要MG:UE通过信令指示同频测量不需要MG(也即UE支持no-gap能力);SSB在激活BWP之内;当前激活BWP是初始BWP。For example, taking SSB measurement, if at least one of the following conditions is met, SSB intra-frequency measurement does not require an MG: the UE indicates through signaling that intra-frequency measurement does not require an MG (that is, the UE supports no-gap capability) ; SSB is within the active BWP; the current active BWP is the initial BWP.
基于此,对于SSB同频测量而言,若UE支持no-gap能力以及网络指示信息确认UE使用no-gap能力的情况下,则SSB同频测量不需要MG,此时,所述MG的状态即为去激活状态,无需再基于测量对象与目标载波之间频域关系而确定。否则,若UE不支持no-gap能力,则所述MG的状态需要基于测量对象与目标载波之间的频域关系来确定。Based on this, for SSB co-frequency measurement, if the UE supports no-gap capability and the network indication information confirms that the UE uses no-gap capability, then SSB co-frequency measurement does not require an MG. At this time, the status of the MG That is, it is a deactivated state, and there is no need to determine based on the frequency domain relationship between the measurement object and the target carrier. Otherwise, if the UE does not support no-gap capability, the status of the MG needs to be determined based on the frequency domain relationship between the measurement object and the target carrier.
进一步地,继续以SSB测量而言,在满足以下所有条件的情况下,SSB异频测量不需要MG:UE支持异频测量不需要MG;网络指示允许异频测量不适用MG;SSB在激活BWP之内。Further, continuing with SSB measurement, SSB inter-frequency measurement does not require MG when all the following conditions are met: UE supports inter-frequency measurement without MG; the network indicates that inter-frequency measurement is not applicable to MG; SSB activates BWP within.
基于此,对于SSB异频测量而言,若上述三个条件均满足(包括UE支持异频测量不需要MG),则SSB异频测量不需要MG,此时,所述MG的状态即为去激活状态。若UE不支持异频测量不需要MG的能力,此时,SSB异频测量必然需要MG,则所述MG的状态为激活状态,也无需基于测量对象与目标载波之间的频域关系来确定。而其余情况下,均需要基于测量对象与目标载波之间的频域关系来确定。Based on this, for SSB inter-frequency measurement, if the above three conditions are met (including that the UE supports inter-frequency measurement and does not require an MG), then the SSB inter-frequency measurement does not require an MG. At this time, the state of the MG is deactivated. Activation status. If the UE does not support inter-frequency measurement and does not require the MG capability, at this time, SSB inter-frequency measurement must require the MG, and the state of the MG is the active state and does not need to be determined based on the frequency domain relationship between the measurement object and the target carrier. . In other cases, it needs to be determined based on the frequency domain relationship between the measurement object and the target carrier.
可以理解的是,以上仅是示例性说明,还可能有其他情况,此处不作穷举。It can be understood that the above is only an illustrative description, and there may be other situations, which are not exhaustive here.
也就是说,在UE能力和/或网络指示信息确定的情况下,网络设备还可以基于测量对象与目标载波之间的频域关系确定MG的状态;进一步地,所述网络设备基于所述频域关系确定是否需要MG,再基于是否需要MG来确定所述MG的状态,比如,所述网络设备基于所述频域关系确定需要MG的情况下,确定所述MG的状态为激活状态;所述网络设备基于所述频域关系确定不需要MG的情况下,确定所述MG的状态为去激活状态。That is to say, when the UE capability and/or network indication information is determined, the network device can also determine the status of the MG based on the frequency domain relationship between the measurement object and the target carrier; further, the network device can determine the status of the MG based on the frequency domain relationship. The domain relationship determines whether an MG is needed, and then determines the status of the MG based on whether the MG is needed. For example, when the network device determines that an MG is needed based on the frequency domain relationship, it determines that the status of the MG is an active state; so When the network device determines that the MG is not needed based on the frequency domain relationship, it determines that the state of the MG is a deactivated state.
可以理解是,该示例中,所述目标载波为网络设备为所述终端设备配置的载波,比如,为网络设备为所述终端设备配置的载波中的至少部分载波。在一具体示例中,所述目标载波为网络设备为所述终端设备配置的所有载波。It can be understood that in this example, the target carrier is a carrier configured by the network device for the terminal device, for example, it is at least part of the carriers configured by the network device for the terminal device. In a specific example, the target carriers are all carriers configured by the network device for the terminal device.
第一种频域关系:测量对象对应的频域范围,与目标载波的频域范围之间的频域关系。此时,所述目标载波为去激活载波或休眠载波,所述目标载波的频域范围指目标载波的整 个频域范围。The first frequency domain relationship: the frequency domain relationship between the frequency domain range corresponding to the measurement object and the frequency domain range of the target carrier. At this time, the target carrier is a deactivated carrier or a dormant carrier, and the frequency domain range of the target carrier refers to the entire frequency domain range of the target carrier.
第二种频域关系:测量对象对应的频域范围,与目标载波中激活BWP所对应的频域范围之间的频域关系。The second frequency domain relationship: the frequency domain relationship between the frequency domain range corresponding to the measurement object and the frequency domain range corresponding to the activated BWP in the target carrier.
第三种频域关系:测量对象对应的频域范围,与目标载波中所配置的任意一个或多个BWP所对应的频域范围之间的频域关系。此时,所述目标载波为休眠载波。The third frequency domain relationship: the frequency domain relationship between the frequency domain range corresponding to the measurement object and the frequency domain range corresponding to any one or more BWPs configured in the target carrier. At this time, the target carrier is a dormant carrier.
基于此,所述目标载波对应的频域范围可以为:目标载波自身的频域范围(也即目标载波的整个频域范围),或者目标载波中激活BWP对应的频域范围,或者,目标载波所配置的一个BWP所对应的频域范围,或者,目标载波所配置的多个(两个或两个以上)BWP所对应的频域范围的组合。为便于描述,下述以目标载波对应的频域范围来指以上所述的任意一种可能。Based on this, the frequency domain range corresponding to the target carrier can be: the frequency domain range of the target carrier itself (that is, the entire frequency domain range of the target carrier), or the frequency domain range corresponding to the activated BWP in the target carrier, or the target carrier The frequency domain range corresponding to one configured BWP, or a combination of frequency domain ranges corresponding to multiple (two or more) BWPs configured for the target carrier. For the convenience of description, any of the above possibilities are referred to below in terms of the frequency domain range corresponding to the target carrier.
进一步地,该示例中,在测量对象对应的频域范围在所述目标载波对应的频域范围内的情况下,不需要MG;此时,终端设备可以确定pre-MG的状态为去激活状态。否则,在测量对象对应的频域范围未在所述目标载波对应的频域范围内的情况下,则需要MG;此时,终端设备可以确定pre-MG的状态为激活状态。这里,具体判断是否需要MG的方式可参照以上终端设备侧的描述,此处不再赘述。Further, in this example, when the frequency domain range corresponding to the measurement object is within the frequency domain range corresponding to the target carrier, the MG is not required; at this time, the terminal device can determine that the state of the pre-MG is the deactivated state. . Otherwise, when the frequency domain range corresponding to the measurement object is not within the frequency domain range corresponding to the target carrier, an MG is required; at this time, the terminal device can determine that the state of the pre-MG is an active state. Here, the specific method of determining whether an MG is required may refer to the above description on the terminal device side, and will not be described again here.
这里,可以理解的是,测量对象对应的频域范围在目标载波对应的至少一个频域范围,如目标载波的频域范围,或目标载波中激活BWP所对应的频域范围内等,则可确认不需要MG。相应的,测量对象对应的频域范围不在目标载波对应的所有频域范围,如,不在目标载波的频域范围内,以及不在目标载波中激活BWP所对应的频域范围内等,则确认需要MG。具体示例可参照以上所述的UE侧的示例,此处不再赘述。Here, it can be understood that if the frequency domain range corresponding to the measurement object is at least one frequency domain range corresponding to the target carrier, such as the frequency domain range of the target carrier, or the frequency domain range corresponding to the activated BWP in the target carrier, etc., then it can be Confirm that MG is not required. Correspondingly, if the frequency domain range corresponding to the measurement object is not within all the frequency domain ranges corresponding to the target carrier, for example, it is not within the frequency domain range of the target carrier, and it is not within the frequency domain range corresponding to the activation of BWP in the target carrier, etc., then confirmation is required. MG. For specific examples, reference may be made to the above-mentioned examples on the UE side, which will not be described again here.
可以理解的是,对于MG为pre-MG的情况而言,所述pre-MG的状态还可以是基于所述频域关系确定是否需要MG确定的;比如,所述pre-MG的状态在基于所述频域关系确定需要MG的情况下为激活状态,所述pre-MG的状态在基于所述频域关系确定不需要MG的情况下为去激活状态。这里,对于如何确定是否需要MG,可以参照上述示例,此处不再赘述。It can be understood that, for the case where the MG is a pre-MG, the state of the pre-MG can also be determined based on the frequency domain relationship to determine whether the MG is needed; for example, the state of the pre-MG is based on The state of the pre-MG is an activated state when it is determined that an MG is required based on the frequency domain relationship, and the state of the pre-MG is a deactivated state when it is determined that an MG is not required based on the frequency domain relationship. Here, as to how to determine whether an MG is required, reference can be made to the above example, which will not be described again here.
针对初始DL BWP方案的网络设备侧的方式二:网络设备控制MG的状态。Method 2 for the network device side of the initial DL BWP solution: the network device controls the status of the MG.
所述网络设备发送状态指示信息,其中,所述状态指示信息用于指示所述MG的状态为激活状态或去激活状态;具体地,所述状态指示信息用于指示在终端设备切换到所述初始DL BWP的情况下所述MG的状态为激活状态或去激活状态。The network device sends status indication information, where the status indication information is used to indicate that the status of the MG is an activation state or a deactivation state; specifically, the status indication information is used to indicate that the terminal device switches to the In the case of initial DL BWP, the state of the MG is activated or deactivated.
在一示例中,在S410之后,所述网络设备发送状态指示信息。也即状态指示信息的发送时机,晚于网络确认MG的状态的时机。In an example, after S410, the network device sends status indication information. That is, the timing of sending the status indication information is later than the timing of the network confirming the status of the MG.
这里,在一示例中,所述状态指示信息由系统消息携带。进一步地,所述系统消息还包括:所述初始DL BWP的配置信息。也就是说,所述状态指示信息可以由包含有初始DL BWP的配置信息的系统消息来携带。Here, in an example, the status indication information is carried by a system message. Further, the system message also includes: configuration information of the initial DL BWP. That is to say, the status indication information may be carried by a system message containing the configuration information of the initial DL BWP.
进一步地,在一具体示例中,该状态指示信息由系统消息中的SIB消息携带。实际应用中,所述SIB消息中还可以有SIB1、SIB2、SIB3等,此时,所述状态指示信息可以由所述SIB消息中SIB1、SIB2、SIB3中的任意一个携带。优选的,所述状态指示信息可以 由所述SIB1携带;进一步地,所述SIB1还包括初始DL BWP的配置信息。也就是说,所述网络设备在SIB1中配置initial DL BWP的同时,还可以配置激活(ON)/去激活(OFF)指示信息(也即状态指示信息),该ON/OFF指示信息用于指示在终端设备切换到所述initial DL BWP的情况下所述MG的状态为激活状态或去激活状态。这样,通过修改SIB1的信息,即可简便并有效地把initial DL BWP和MG的ON/OFF指示信息关联起来。Further, in a specific example, the status indication information is carried by the SIB message in the system message. In practical applications, the SIB message may also include SIB1, SIB2, SIB3, etc. In this case, the status indication information may be carried by any one of SIB1, SIB2, and SIB3 in the SIB message. Preferably, the status indication information can be carried by the SIB1; further, the SIB1 also includes the configuration information of the initial DL BWP. That is to say, while the network device configures the initial DL BWP in SIB1, it can also configure activation (ON)/deactivation (OFF) indication information (that is, status indication information). The ON/OFF indication information is used to indicate When the terminal device switches to the initial DL BWP, the state of the MG is the activated state or the deactivated state. In this way, by modifying the information of SIB1, the initial DL BWP and the ON/OFF indication information of the MG can be associated simply and effectively.
在另一具体示例中,所述状态指示信息由系统消息中的MIB消息携带,此时,所述MIB消息隐式地携带(比如通过MIB消息中的CORESET#0携带)初始DL BWP的配置信息。也就是说,所述网络设备在MIB消息中配置initial DL BWP的同时,还可以配置ON/OFF指示信息(也即状态指示信息),该ON/OFF指示信息用于指示在终端设备切换到所述initial DL BWP的情况下所述MG的状态为激活状态或去激活状态。这样,通过修改MIB消息,即可简便并有效地把initial DL BWP和MG的ON/OFF指示信息关联起来。In another specific example, the status indication information is carried by the MIB message in the system message. At this time, the MIB message implicitly carries (for example, carried by CORESET#0 in the MIB message) the configuration information of the initial DL BWP. . That is to say, while the network device configures the initial DL BWP in the MIB message, it can also configure ON/OFF indication information (that is, status indication information). The ON/OFF indication information is used to indicate when the terminal device switches to the desired state. In the case of the initial DL BWP, the state of the MG is the activated state or the deactivated state. In this way, by modifying the MIB message, the initial DL BWP and the MG's ON/OFF indication information can be associated simply and effectively.
可以理解的是,本申请方案对携带状态指示信息的具体系统消息不作限制,只要能够通过系统消息携带该状态指示信息的方案,均在本申请方案的保护范围内,这里不作穷举。It can be understood that the solution of this application does not limit the specific system messages carrying status indication information. As long as the system message can carry the status indication information, it is within the protection scope of the solution of this application, and is not exhaustive here.
需要说明的是,该方式在实际应用中,UE还未与网络设备建立RRC连接,未完成MG(或pre-MG)相关的能力上报和测量对象(Measuring Object,MO)配置等。基于此,网络设备在配置相应的测量对象时需要考虑已配置好的ON/OFF指示信息。It should be noted that in the actual application of this method, the UE has not yet established an RRC connection with the network device, and has not completed MG (or pre-MG) related capability reporting and measurement object (Measuring Object, MO) configuration. Based on this, the network device needs to consider the configured ON/OFF indication information when configuring the corresponding measurement object.
在另一示例中,所述状态指示信息由RRC信令携带。也就是说,通过RRC信令来配置ON/OFF指示信息(也即状态指示信息)。该示例中,所述RRC信令还包括BWP的配置信息,比如,ON/OFF指示信息放在BWP的配置信息内,即网络设备在RRC信令中配置BWP的配置信息的同时,配置对应的ON/OFF指示信息,该ON/OFF指示信息用于指示在终端设备切换到所述initial DL BWP的情况下所述MG的状态为激活状态或去激活状态。In another example, the status indication information is carried by RRC signaling. That is to say, ON/OFF indication information (that is, status indication information) is configured through RRC signaling. In this example, the RRC signaling also includes BWP configuration information. For example, the ON/OFF indication information is placed in the BWP configuration information. That is, the network device configures the BWP configuration information in the RRC signaling and at the same time configures the corresponding ON/OFF indication information, the ON/OFF indication information is used to indicate that the state of the MG is an activated state or a deactivated state when the terminal device switches to the initial DL BWP.
进一步地,在一具体示例中,所述状态指示信息由所述RRC信令中的服务小区配置(servingCellconfig)信息携带。该示例中,所述RRC信令还包括BWP的配置信息;比如ON/OFF指示信息置于servingCellconfig信息内新增的信息(或称字段)内。Further, in a specific example, the status indication information is carried by serving cell configuration (servingCellconfig) information in the RRC signaling. In this example, the RRC signaling also includes BWP configuration information; for example, the ON/OFF indication information is placed in the newly added information (or field) in the servingCellconfig information.
举例来说,所述网络设备在servingCellconfig信息内配置BWP的配置信息的同时,新增preGapStatueForInitialDownlinkBWP字段,以配置ON/OFF指示信息。这里,preGapStatueForInitialDownlinkBWP字段的格式如下:For example, while configuring the BWP configuration information in the servingCellconfig information, the network device also adds a preGapStatueForInitialDownlinkBWP field to configure ON/OFF indication information. Here, the format of the preGapStatueForInitialDownlinkBWP field is as follows:
preGapStatueForInitialDownlinkBWP ENUMERATED{ON,OFF}。preGapStatueForInitialDownlinkBWP ENUMERATED{ON,OFF}.
其中,ON表示在终端设备切换到所述initial DL BWP的情况下所述MG的状态为激活状态;OFF表示在终端设备切换到所述initial DL BWP的情况下所述MG的状态为去激活状态。Among them, ON means that the state of the MG is the activated state when the terminal device switches to the initial DL BWP; OFF means that the state of the MG is the deactivated state when the terminal device switches to the initial DL BWP. .
可以理解的是,以上preGapStatueForInitialDownlinkBWP仅为初始下行BWP对应的状态指示信息的一种示意。实际应用中,该字段可以为其他的格式,例如默认为OFF,或者只有在ON的时候需要网络配置,如:It can be understood that the above preGapStatueForInitialDownlinkBWP is only an indication of the status indication information corresponding to the initial downlink BWP. In actual applications, this field can be in other formats, such as OFF by default, or network configuration is required only when ON, such as:
preGapStatueForInitialDownlinkBWP ON,optional;preGapStatueForInitialDownlinkBWP ON, optional;
又或者,通过一组序列来指示多个BWP对应的MG的状态,该多个BWP对应的MG 的状态中的一个(如第一个)对应初始下行BWP,如:Or, a set of sequences is used to indicate the status of MGs corresponding to multiple BWPs, and one of the statuses (such as the first one) of the MGs corresponding to multiple BWPs corresponds to the initial downlink BWP, such as:
preGapStatueForDownlinkBWP SEQUENCE(SIZE(1..numOfBwp))OF OnOffIndicator。preGapStatueForDownlinkBWP SEQUENCE(SIZE(1..numOfBwp))OF OnOffIndicator.
实际应用中,所述服务小区配置信息中可能还包括如下字段中的至少一个:In practical applications, the serving cell configuration information may also include at least one of the following fields:
下行BWP的释放列表(downlinkBWP-ToReleaseList);Downlink BWP release list (downlinkBWP-ToReleaseList);
下行BWP的增加修改列表(downlinkBWP-ToAddModList);Add modification list of downlink BWP (downlinkBWP-ToAddModList);
BWP的去激活定时器(bwp-InactivityTimer);BWP’s deactivation timer (bwp-InactivityTimer);
默认下行BWP标识(defaultDownlinkBWP-Id)。Default downlink BWP identifier (defaultDownlinkBWP-Id).
可以理解的是,实际应用中,初始下行BWP对应的状态指示信息可以包含在服务小区配置servingCellconfig信息中,或者其他小区级别的配置信息中;进一步的,servingCellconfig信息可以包含以上BWP的配置信息,或者为RRC信令中,与BWP的配置信息为同一层级的信息,本申请方案对此不作限制,只要小区级别的RRC信令携带有初始下行BWP对应的状态指示信息均在本申请方案的保护范围内,这里不作穷举。It can be understood that in actual applications, the status indication information corresponding to the initial downlink BWP can be included in the serving cell configuration information, or other cell-level configuration information; further, the servingCellconfig information can include the above BWP configuration information, or In the RRC signaling, the configuration information of the BWP is the same level of information. The solution of this application does not limit this. As long as the RRC signaling at the cell level carries the status indication information corresponding to the initial downlink BWP, it is within the protection scope of the solution of this application. There is no exhaustive list here.
在另一示例中,所述状态指示信息由RRC信令携带。也就是说,通过RRC信令来配置ON/OFF指示信息(也即状态指示信息)。该示例中,所述ON/OFF指示信息可以具体通过载波对应的位图(Bitmap)中的比特表示,该载波对应的位图携带于RRC信令中,此时,所述RRC信令还可以携带BWP的配置信息,本申请方案对RRC所携带的其他信息不作限制,只有RRC信令中携带有载波对应的位图,且该Bitmap中的比特能够表示ON/OFF指示信息,均在本申请方案的包含范围内。In another example, the status indication information is carried by RRC signaling. That is to say, ON/OFF indication information (that is, status indication information) is configured through RRC signaling. In this example, the ON/OFF indication information can be specifically represented by the bits in the bitmap corresponding to the carrier. The bitmap corresponding to the carrier is carried in the RRC signaling. At this time, the RRC signaling can also Carrying BWP configuration information, the solution of this application does not limit other information carried by RRC. Only the RRC signaling carries the bitmap corresponding to the carrier, and the bits in the Bitmap can represent ON/OFF indication information, both of which are included in this application. within the scope of the program.
进一步地,对于ON/OFF指示信息通过载波对应Bitmap中的比特来表示的情况,可以在载波对应的Bitmap中新增一比特,即载波对应的位图中存在一比特表示初始DL BWP的ON/OFF指示信息,剩余比特中的比特用于指示载波对应的其他DL BWP中与该比特对应的DL BWP的相关信息,比如,指示该比特对应的DL BWP的MG的激活状态或激活状态。Further, for the case where the ON/OFF indication information is represented by the bits in the Bitmap corresponding to the carrier, a new bit can be added to the Bitmap corresponding to the carrier, that is, there is a bit in the bitmap corresponding to the carrier to represent the ON/OFF of the initial DL BWP. OFF indication information, the bits in the remaining bits are used to indicate the relevant information of the DL BWP corresponding to the bit in other DL BWPs corresponding to the carrier, for example, indicating the activation status or activation status of the MG of the DL BWP corresponding to the bit.
举例来说,载波对应的DL BWP(也即载波上配置的DL BWP)共N个,此时,该载波对应的Bitmap的长度则为N+1,其中,所述Bitmap中第一比特指示初始DL BWP对应的MG的状态,比如,第一比特为0时,指示为OFF,第一比特为1时,指示为ON;而剩余N个比特中的比特用于指示载波对应的DL BWP中与该比特对应的DL BWP的MG的状态。可以理解的是,以上仅为一具体示例,实际应用中,表示ON/OFF指示信息的比特还可以是Bitmap中的其他比特,本申请方案对此不作限制。For example, there are N DL BWPs corresponding to the carrier (that is, the DL BWP configured on the carrier). At this time, the length of the Bitmap corresponding to the carrier is N+1, where the first bit in the Bitmap indicates the initial The status of the MG corresponding to the DL BWP. For example, when the first bit is 0, the indication is OFF, and when the first bit is 1, the indication is ON; and the remaining N bits are used to indicate the DL BWP corresponding to the carrier. This bit corresponds to the MG status of the DL BWP. It can be understood that the above is only a specific example. In actual applications, the bits representing the ON/OFF indication information can also be other bits in the Bitmap, and the solution of this application is not limited to this.
可以理解的是,以上示例中,UE配置有一个MG,或称UE对应有一个MG,对于UE配置有(或对应有)两个或两个以上的MG而言,可以参照如下示例。It can be understood that in the above example, the UE is configured with one MG, or the UE is configured with (or corresponds to) one MG. If the UE is configured with (or corresponds to) two or more MGs, refer to the following example.
在另一示例中,所述状态指示信息由RRC信令携带,而且,所述状态指示信息用于指示终端设备切换到初始DL BWP的情况下MG的状态为去激活状态。进一步地,所述状态指示信息由所述RRC信令中的与初始DL BWP对应的去激活MG列表携带,即该去激活MG列表中记录有终端设备切换到初始DL BWP的情况下的MG的唯一标识(ID)。也就是说,该示例中,若与初始DL BWP对应的去激活MG列表中携带MG的唯一标识,则可 确认当UE切换到所述初始DL BWP时,该唯一标识对应的MG的状态为去激活状态;而为UE预配置的其他MG,即其他MG ID不在该初始DL BWP对应的去激活MG列表中,则其他MG的状态默认为或协议规定为激活状态。举例来说,网络设备为UE配置有两个MG,唯一标识分别为MG1和MG2;UE接收到RRC信令,并解析得到与该初始DL BWP对应的去激活MG列表中的MG1,此时,即可确认当UE切换到初始DL BWP时,MG1对应的MG的状态为去激活状态,而MG2对应的MG的状态为默认的激活状态。In another example, the status indication information is carried by RRC signaling, and the status indication information is used to indicate that the status of the MG is the deactivated status when the terminal device switches to the initial DL BWP. Further, the status indication information is carried by the deactivated MG list corresponding to the initial DL BWP in the RRC signaling, that is, the deactivated MG list records the MGs when the terminal device switches to the initial DL BWP. Unique identification (ID). That is to say, in this example, if the deactivated MG list corresponding to the initial DL BWP carries the unique identifier of the MG, it can be confirmed that when the UE switches to the initial DL BWP, the status of the MG corresponding to the unique identifier is deactivated. Activated state; while other MGs preconfigured for the UE, that is, other MG IDs are not in the deactivated MG list corresponding to the initial DL BWP, the status of other MGs defaults to the activated state or is stipulated by the protocol. For example, the network device configures two MGs for the UE, and the unique identifiers are MG1 and MG2 respectively; the UE receives the RRC signaling and parses it to obtain MG1 in the deactivated MG list corresponding to the initial DL BWP. At this time, It can be confirmed that when the UE switches to the initial DL BWP, the state of the MG corresponding to MG1 is the deactivated state, and the state of the MG corresponding to MG2 is the default activated state.
这里,所述RRC信令还包括servingCellconfig信息,所述状态指示信息由所述servingCellconfig信息携带,也即该初始DL BWP对应的去激活MG列表还可以在servingCellconfig信息中。举例来说,所述网络设备在servingCellconfig信息内新增为初始DL BWP对应的去激活MG列表(deactivatedMeasGapListForInitialDownlinkBWP)字段,以指示当UE切换到初始DL BWP的情况下,需要将哪些MG去激活。Here, the RRC signaling also includes servingCellconfig information, and the status indication information is carried by the servingCellconfig information. That is, the deactivated MG list corresponding to the initial DL BWP can also be in the servingCellconfig information. For example, the network device adds a deactivated MG list (deactivatedMeasGapListForInitialDownlinkBWP) field corresponding to the initial DL BWP in the servingCellconfig information to indicate which MGs need to be deactivated when the UE switches to the initial DL BWP.
这里,deactivatedMeasGapListForInitialDownlinkBWP字段的格式如下:Here, the format of the deactivatedMeasGapListForInitialDownlinkBWP field is as follows:
deactivatedMeasGapListForInitialDownlinkBWP SEQUENCE(SIZE(1,maxNorfGapId-r17))of MeasGapId-r17,OPTIONAL。deactivatedMeasGapListForInitialDownlinkBWP SEQUENCE(SIZE(1,maxNorfGapId-r17))of MeasGapId-r17,OPTIONAL.
又或者,所述RRC信令还包括BWP的配置信息,此时,所述状态指示信息在所述BWP的配置信息中,也即该初始DL BWP对应的去激活MG列表还可以在所述BWP的配置信息中。或者,所述状态指示信息不在所述BWP的配置信息中。Or, the RRC signaling also includes the configuration information of the BWP. At this time, the status indication information is in the configuration information of the BWP, that is, the deactivated MG list corresponding to the initial DL BWP can also be in the BWP. configuration information. Or, the status indication information is not in the configuration information of the BWP.
又或者,所述RRC信令包括servingCellconfig信息,所述servingCellconfig信息包括BWP的配置信息,此时,所述状态指示信息在所述BWP的配置信息中,也即该初始DL BWP对应的去激活MG列表在所述BWP的配置信息中。也就是说,所述RRC信令的servingCellconfig信息中配置有BWP的配置信息,所述BWP的配置信息配置有初始DL BWP对应的去激活MG列表。Or, the RRC signaling includes servingCellconfig information, and the servingCellconfig information includes the configuration information of the BWP. At this time, the status indication information is in the configuration information of the BWP, that is, the deactivated MG corresponding to the initial DL BWP. The list is in the configuration information of the BWP. That is to say, the servingCellconfig information of the RRC signaling is configured with BWP configuration information, and the BWP configuration information is configured with a deactivated MG list corresponding to the initial DL BWP.
又或者,所述BWP的配置信息还可以不在servingCellconfig信息中,比如,RRC信令中,所述servingCellconfig信息与BWP的配置信息为同一层级的信息等,本申请方案对此不作限制。Alternatively, the BWP configuration information may not be included in the servingCellconfig information. For example, in RRC signaling, the servingCellconfig information and the BWP configuration information are information at the same level, etc. This application solution does not limit this.
需要说明的是,MG的配置信息可以在该去激活MG列表之外,而该去激活MG列表中只记录与BWP(比如,初始DL BWP)关联的MG的唯一标识,此时,只要能够通过MG的唯一标识唯一定位到MG的配置信息即可。It should be noted that the configuration information of the MG can be outside the deactivated MG list, and the deactivated MG list only records the unique identifier of the MG associated with the BWP (for example, the initial DL BWP). At this time, as long as it can pass The unique identifier of the MG can uniquely locate the configuration information of the MG.
可以理解的是,以上仅为一具体示例,实际应用中,只要RRC信令中包含该去激活MG列表,且该去激活MG列表中记录有本申请方案所述的初始DL BWP对应的MG的唯一标识,均属于本申请方案的保护范围。It can be understood that the above is only a specific example. In practical applications, as long as the deactivated MG list is included in the RRC signaling, and the deactivated MG list records the MG corresponding to the initial DL BWP described in the solution of this application. Unique identifiers all fall within the scope of protection of this application plan.
这里,对于当UE切换到休眠BWP的情况下,所述UE侧的方案具体如下:Here, when the UE switches to dormant BWP, the solution on the UE side is as follows:
图5是根据本申请一实施例的通信方法的示意性流程图三。该方法可选地可以应用于图1所示的系统,但并不仅限于此。该方法包括以下内容的至少部分内容。Figure 5 is a schematic flow chart 3 of a communication method according to an embodiment of the present application. This method can optionally be applied to the system shown in Figure 1, but is not limited thereto. The method includes at least part of the following.
S510,终端设备切换到休眠带宽分段BWP的情况下,确定测量间隔MG的状态,所述MG的状态为激活状态或去激活状态。S510: When the terminal device switches to the dormant bandwidth segment BWP, determine the state of the measurement interval MG, and the state of the MG is an activated state or a deactivated state.
这里,所述休眠BWP为SCell所对应的BWP,也即网络设备为SCell所配置的。Here, the sleep BWP is the BWP corresponding to the SCell, that is, the network device is configured for the SCell.
在一具体示例中,所述MG为预配置测量间隔pre-MG;所述pre-MG是对MG增强后所得;这里,所述pre-MG的状态(如激活状态或去激活状态)会随着BWP切换而改变。在另一具体示例中,所述MG还可以为通过如RRC信令等配置的网络控制小间隔(Network control small gap,NCSG)。优选的,本实施例提供的方案尤其适用于所述MG为pre-MG的场景。也即S510具体为:终端设备切换到休眠BWP的情况下,确定pre-MG的状态,所述pre-MG的状态为激活状态或去激活状态。In a specific example, the MG is a pre-configured measurement interval pre-MG; the pre-MG is obtained by enhancing the MG; here, the state of the pre-MG (such as activation state or deactivation state) will change with Changes when BWP switches. In another specific example, the MG may also be a Network control small gap (NCSG) configured through RRC signaling, etc. Preferably, the solution provided by this embodiment is particularly suitable for the scenario where the MG is a pre-MG. That is to say, S510 is specifically: when the terminal device switches to the dormant BWP, determine the state of the pre-MG, and the state of the pre-MG is an activated state or a deactivated state.
需要说明的是,实际应用中,所述终端设备只有在成功切换到休眠BWP的情况下(该示例中,将成功切换到休眠BWP的时机称为成功切换时机),才需要去确认MG的状态。而确认MG的状态的时机(该示例中,简称状态确定时机,比如,在终端设备切换至休眠BWP的时刻,或者,在终端设备切换至休眠BWP之后的任意时刻),与配置完成MG的状态(该配置可以在终端设备侧进行,或在网络设备侧,此处对具体的配置端不作限制)的时机(该示例中,将配置完成MG的状态的时机简称为配置完成时机)可以不同,只要在终端设备需要确认MG的状态之前,MG的状态的配置完成即可。实际应用中,还可能出现终端设备需要确认MG的状态的时候但尚未配置完成的情况,此时,终端设备需要等待MG的状态的配置,如此,在配置完成后,终端设备再去确认MG的状态。It should be noted that in actual applications, the terminal device only needs to confirm the status of the MG when it successfully switches to the dormant BWP (in this example, the timing of successfully switching to the dormant BWP is called the successful switching timing). . The timing of confirming the status of the MG (in this example, referred to as the status determination timing, for example, when the terminal device switches to the dormant BWP, or at any time after the terminal device switches to the dormant BWP), is different from the status of the MG after the configuration is completed. (This configuration can be performed on the terminal device side, or on the network device side. There is no restriction on the specific configuration end here.) The timing (in this example, the timing of completing the configuration of the MG status is referred to as the configuration completion timing) can be different. As long as the configuration of the MG status is completed before the terminal device needs to confirm the MG status. In actual applications, it may also happen that the terminal device needs to confirm the status of the MG but the configuration has not been completed. At this time, the terminal device needs to wait for the configuration of the MG status. In this way, after the configuration is completed, the terminal device then confirms the MG's status. state.
基于上述分析可知存在三个时机,分别为成功切换时机、状态确定时机以及配置完成时机,其中,除成功切换时机早于状态确认时机外,还会存在以下几种情况:Based on the above analysis, it can be seen that there are three timings, namely the timing of successful switching, the timing of status confirmation, and the timing of configuration completion. In addition to the timing of successful switching being earlier than the timing of status confirmation, there are also the following situations:
情况一:配置完成时机早于成功切换时机,此时,由于成功切换时机早于状态确认时机,所以,配置完成时机也必然早于状态确认时机。Scenario 1: The configuration completion time is earlier than the successful switching time. At this time, since the successful switching time is earlier than the status confirmation time, the configuration completion time must also be earlier than the status confirmation time.
情况二:配置完成时机与成功切换时机相同,均早于状态确认时机。Scenario 2: The configuration completion time is the same as the successful switching time, both of which are earlier than the status confirmation time.
情况三:配置完成时机晚于成功切换时机,但早于状态确认时机。Scenario 3: The configuration completion time is later than the successful switching time, but earlier than the status confirmation time.
情况四:配置完成时机晚于状态确认时机,此时,也必然晚于成功切换时机;该情况下,终端设备可能需要等待MG的状态配置完成后,再去确定测量间隔MG的状态。Scenario 4: The configuration completion time is later than the status confirmation time. In this case, it must also be later than the successful switching time. In this case, the terminal device may need to wait for the MG status configuration to be completed before determining the measurement interval MG status.
可以理解的是,本申请方案对上述三种时机的顺序不作具体限定(可以理解的是,除了成功切换时机早于状态确定时机之外,其他时机的顺序不作限制),实际应用中,只要能够实现S510的方案均在本申请方案的保护范围内,这里不作穷举。It can be understood that the solution of this application does not specifically limit the order of the above three timings (it can be understood that, except for the successful switching timing being earlier than the status determination timing, the sequence of other timings is not limited). In practical applications, as long as it can Solutions for implementing S510 are all within the protection scope of this application solution, and are not exhaustive here.
值得注意的是,本申请方案所述的MG均可以替换为pre-MG。下述内容以MG为例进行说明,针对pre-MG的示例不再赘述。It is worth noting that the MG described in the solution of this application can be replaced by pre-MG. The following content uses MG as an example to illustrate, and the pre-MG example will not be described again.
本申请方案中,所述终端设备可以采用如下两种方式来确定MG的状态,具体包括:In this application solution, the terminal device can use the following two methods to determine the status of the MG, specifically including:
对于休眠BWP方案的终端设备侧的方式一,终端设备自主确定MG的状态;For the first method on the terminal device side of the dormant BWP solution, the terminal device independently determines the status of the MG;
第一种确定方式:默认或协议规定;所述MG的状态是所述终端设备默认的,或协议规定的。比如,所述终端设备默认所述MG的状态为激活状态,或者所述终端设备默认所述MG的状态为去激活状态。又比如,所述终端设备基于协议规定确定所述MG的状态为激活状态,或者去激活状态。显然,该方式简便,无需额外的信令指示。The first determination method: default or protocol stipulation; the state of the MG is the terminal device's default or protocol stipulation. For example, the terminal device defaults the state of the MG to the activated state, or the terminal device defaults the state of the MG to the deactivated state. For another example, the terminal device determines that the state of the MG is an activated state or a deactivated state based on protocol regulations. Obviously, this method is simple and requires no additional signaling instructions.
可以理解的是,对于默认方式而言,为便于终端设备与网络设备所确认的MG的状态相同,所述网络设备和终端设备需要预先约定,比如终端设备和网络设备均默认MG的状态为激活状态,或者,均默认MG的状态为去激活状态。对于协议规定方式而言,终端设 备和网络设备基于协议所确定的所述MG的状态相同,比如均为激活状态,或者去激活状态。It can be understood that, for the default mode, in order to facilitate the terminal device and the network device to confirm that the MG status is the same, the network device and the terminal device need to agree in advance. For example, the terminal device and the network device both default to the MG status as activated. status, or, the default MG status is deactivated. For the protocol stipulation method, the status of the MG determined by the terminal device and the network device based on the protocol is the same, such as an activated state or a deactivated state.
在一具体示例中,所述终端设备默认或基于协议确定所述pre-MG的状态为去激活状态。也就是说,该方式中,UE在判断时无需考虑状态指示信息(用于指示终端设备切换到休眠带宽分段BWP的情况下确定pre-MG的状态),或者无论网络设备侧的状态指示信息所指示的状态是ON或OFF,UE均默认为去激活状态来进行后续处理。当然,实际应用中,对于默认方式而言,网络设备侧也无需配置该状态指示信息。进一步地,为便于终端设备与网络设备所确认的MG的状态相同,此时,所述网络设备也默认所述MG的状态为去激活状态。如此,为充分利用资源(如休眠BWP所对应的资源)奠定了基础,同时,灵活性也更高。In a specific example, the terminal device determines that the state of the pre-MG is a deactivated state by default or based on a protocol. That is to say, in this method, the UE does not need to consider the status indication information (used to instruct the terminal device to switch to the dormant bandwidth segment BWP to determine the status of the pre-MG) when making judgments, or regardless of the status indication information on the network device side. The indicated state is ON or OFF, and the UE defaults to the deactivated state for subsequent processing. Of course, in actual applications, for the default mode, the network device side does not need to configure the status indication information. Further, in order to facilitate the terminal device and the network device to confirm that the MG status is the same, at this time, the network device also defaults to the deactivated status of the MG. In this way, it lays the foundation for full utilization of resources (such as those corresponding to dormant BWP), and at the same time, the flexibility is higher.
可以理解的是,实际应用中还可以采用其他约定方式,本申请方案对此不作限制,只要网络设备和终端设备所确认的MG的状态相同,均在本申请方案的保护范围内,这里不作穷举。It can be understood that other agreement methods can also be used in actual applications. This application solution does not limit this. As long as the status of the MG confirmed by the network device and the terminal device is the same, it is within the protection scope of this application solution. There is no limit here. Lift.
第二种确定方式:判断机制;具体包括:The second determination method: judgment mechanism; specifically includes:
判断机制一:所述MG的状态为基于测量对象与目标载波的频域关系确定的。进一步地,所述MG的状态为基于所述频域关系确定是否需要MG确定的。比如,所述MG的状态在基于所述频域关系确定需要MG的情况下为激活状态,所述MG的状态在基于所述频域关系确定不需要MG的情况下为去激活状态。Judgment mechanism one: The status of the MG is determined based on the frequency domain relationship between the measurement object and the target carrier. Further, the status of the MG is determined based on the frequency domain relationship to determine whether the MG is required. For example, the state of the MG is the activated state when it is determined that the MG is needed based on the frequency domain relationship, and the state of the MG is the deactivated state when it is determined that the MG is not needed based on the frequency domain relationship.
需要说明的是,该示例在BWP切换场景下,所以,UE能力和网络指示信息均已确认,基于此,所述MG的状态在UE能力和/或网络指示信息确定的情况下,再基于测量对象与目标载波之间的频域关系确定的。It should be noted that this example is in a BWP handover scenario, so the UE capabilities and network indication information have been confirmed. Based on this, when the UE capabilities and/or network indication information are determined, the status of the MG is determined based on measurements. The frequency domain relationship between the object and the target carrier is determined.
举例来说,以SSB测量而言,在满足以下至少之一条件的情况下,SSB同频测量不需要MG:UE通过信令指示同频测量不需要MG(也即UE支持no-gap能力);SSB在激活BWP之内;当前激活BWP是初始BWP。For example, taking SSB measurement, if at least one of the following conditions is met, SSB intra-frequency measurement does not require an MG: the UE indicates through signaling that intra-frequency measurement does not require an MG (that is, the UE supports no-gap capability) ; SSB is within the active BWP; the current active BWP is the initial BWP.
基于此,对于SSB同频测量而言,若UE支持no-gap能力以及网络指示信息确认UE使用no-gap能力的情况下,则SSB同频测量不需要MG,此时,所述MG的状态即为去激活状态,无需再基于测量对象与目标载波之间频域关系而确定。否则,若UE不支持no-gap能力,则所述MG的状态需要基于测量对象与目标载波之间的频域关系来确定。Based on this, for SSB co-frequency measurement, if the UE supports no-gap capability and the network indication information confirms that the UE uses no-gap capability, then SSB co-frequency measurement does not require an MG. At this time, the status of the MG That is, it is a deactivated state, and there is no need to determine based on the frequency domain relationship between the measurement object and the target carrier. Otherwise, if the UE does not support no-gap capability, the status of the MG needs to be determined based on the frequency domain relationship between the measurement object and the target carrier.
进一步地,继续以SSB测量而言,在满足以下所有条件的情况下,SSB异频测量不需要MG:UE支持异频测量不需要MG;网络指示允许异频测量不适用MG;SSB在激活BWP之内。Further, continuing with SSB measurement, SSB inter-frequency measurement does not require MG when all the following conditions are met: UE supports inter-frequency measurement without MG; the network indicates that inter-frequency measurement is not applicable to MG; SSB activates BWP within.
基于此,对于SSB异频测量而言,若上述三个条件均满足(包括UE支持异频测量不需要MG),则SSB异频测量不需要MG,此时,所述MG的状态即为去激活状态。若UE不支持异频测量不需要MG的能力,此时,SSB异频测量必然需要MG,则所述MG的状态为激活状态,也无需基于测量对象与目标载波之间的频域关系来确定。而其余情况下,均需要基于测量对象与目标载波之间的频域关系来确定。Based on this, for SSB inter-frequency measurement, if the above three conditions are met (including that the UE supports inter-frequency measurement and does not require an MG), then the SSB inter-frequency measurement does not require an MG. At this time, the state of the MG is deactivated. Activation status. If the UE does not support inter-frequency measurement and does not require the MG capability, at this time, SSB inter-frequency measurement must require the MG, and the state of the MG is the active state and does not need to be determined based on the frequency domain relationship between the measurement object and the target carrier. . In other cases, it needs to be determined based on the frequency domain relationship between the measurement object and the target carrier.
可以理解的是,以上仅是示例性说明,还可能有其他情况,此处不作穷举。It can be understood that the above is only an illustrative description, and there may be other situations, which are not exhaustive here.
也就是说,在UE能力和/或网络指示信息确定的情况下,所述终端设备基于测量对象与目标载波之间的频域关系确定MG的状态;进一步地,所述终端设备基于所述频域关系确定是否需要MG,再基于是否需要MG确定所述MG的状态,比如,所述终端设备基于所述频域关系确定需要MG的情况下,确定所述MG的状态为激活状态;所述终端设备基于所述频域关系确定不需要MG的情况下,确定所述MG的状态为去激活状态。That is to say, when the UE capability and/or network indication information is determined, the terminal device determines the status of the MG based on the frequency domain relationship between the measurement object and the target carrier; further, the terminal device determines the status of the MG based on the frequency domain relationship. The domain relationship determines whether an MG is needed, and then determines the status of the MG based on whether the MG is needed. For example, when the terminal device determines that an MG is needed based on the frequency domain relationship, it determines that the status of the MG is an active state; When the terminal device determines that the MG is not needed based on the frequency domain relationship, it determines that the state of the MG is a deactivated state.
可以理解是,该示例中,所述目标载波为网络设备为所述终端设备配置的载波。比如,所述目标载波为网络设备为所述终端设备配置的载波中的至少部分载波,这里,该至少部分载波包括休眠BWP所在的载波;或者,所述目标载波为网络设备为所述终端设备配置的所有载波,包含休眠BWP所在的载波。It can be understood that in this example, the target carrier is a carrier configured by the network device for the terminal device. For example, the target carrier is at least part of the carriers configured by the network device for the terminal device. Here, the at least part of the carriers includes the carrier where the dormant BWP is located; or the target carrier is the network device for the terminal device. All configured carriers, including the carrier where the dormant BWP is located.
需要说明的是,所述的测量对象与目标载波之间的频域关系可以具体为以下关系中的至少一种:It should be noted that the frequency domain relationship between the measurement object and the target carrier may be specifically at least one of the following relationships:
第一种频域关系:测量对象对应的频域范围,与目标载波的频域范围之间的频域关系。此时,所述目标载波为去激活载波或休眠载波,所述目标载波的频域范围指目标载波的整个频域范围。The first frequency domain relationship: the frequency domain relationship between the frequency domain range corresponding to the measurement object and the frequency domain range of the target carrier. At this time, the target carrier is a deactivated carrier or a dormant carrier, and the frequency domain range of the target carrier refers to the entire frequency domain range of the target carrier.
第二种频域关系:测量对象对应的频域范围,与目标载波中激活BWP所对应的频域范围之间的频域关系。The second frequency domain relationship: the frequency domain relationship between the frequency domain range corresponding to the measurement object and the frequency domain range corresponding to the activated BWP in the target carrier.
第三种频域关系:测量对象对应的频域范围,与目标载波中所配置的任意一个或多个BWP所对应的频域范围之间的频域关系。此时,所述目标载波为休眠载波。The third frequency domain relationship: the frequency domain relationship between the frequency domain range corresponding to the measurement object and the frequency domain range corresponding to any one or more BWPs configured in the target carrier. At this time, the target carrier is a dormant carrier.
基于此,所述目标载波对应的频域范围可以为:目标载波自身的频域范围(也即目标载波的整个频域范围),或者目标载波中激活BWP对应的频域范围,或者,目标载波所配置的一个BWP所对应的频域范围,或者,目标载波所配置的多个(两个或两个以上)BWP所对应的频域范围的组合。为便于描述,下述以目标载波对应的频域范围来指以上所述的任意一种可能。Based on this, the frequency domain range corresponding to the target carrier can be: the frequency domain range of the target carrier itself (that is, the entire frequency domain range of the target carrier), or the frequency domain range corresponding to the activated BWP in the target carrier, or the target carrier The frequency domain range corresponding to one configured BWP, or a combination of frequency domain ranges corresponding to multiple (two or more) BWPs configured for the target carrier. For the convenience of description, any of the above possibilities are referred to below in terms of the frequency domain range corresponding to the target carrier.
进一步地,该示例中,在测量对象对应的频域范围在所述目标载波对应的频域范围内的情况下,不需要MG;此时,终端设备可以确定MG的状态为去激活状态。否则,在测量对象对应的频域范围不在所述目标载波对应的频域范围内的情况下,则需要MG;此时,终端设备可以确定MG的状态为激活状态。Further, in this example, when the frequency domain range corresponding to the measurement object is within the frequency domain range corresponding to the target carrier, the MG is not required; at this time, the terminal device can determine that the state of the MG is a deactivated state. Otherwise, when the frequency domain range corresponding to the measurement object is not within the frequency domain range corresponding to the target carrier, an MG is required; at this time, the terminal device can determine that the state of the MG is an active state.
这里,可以理解的是,测量对象对应的频域范围在目标载波对应的至少一个频域范围,如在目标载波的频域范围内,或者在目标载波中激活BWP所对应的频域范围内,或者在目标载波所配置的至少一个BWP的频域范围内等,则均可确认不需要MG。Here, it can be understood that the frequency domain range corresponding to the measurement object is at least one frequency domain range corresponding to the target carrier, such as within the frequency domain range of the target carrier, or within the frequency domain range corresponding to activating BWP in the target carrier, Or within the frequency domain range of at least one BWP configured on the target carrier, etc., it can be confirmed that no MG is required.
相应的,测量对象对应的频域范围不在目标载波对应的所有频域范围内,如不在目标载波的频域范围内,以及不在目标载波中激活BWP所对应的频域范围内,以及不在目标载波所配置的至少一个BWP的频域范围内等,则确认需要MG。Correspondingly, the frequency domain range corresponding to the measurement object is not within all frequency domain ranges corresponding to the target carrier, such as not within the frequency domain range of the target carrier, and not within the frequency domain range corresponding to the activation of BWP in the target carrier, and not within the target carrier. Within the frequency domain range of at least one configured BWP, etc., it is confirmed that an MG is required.
举例来说,网络设备为终端设备配置三个测量对象,每个测量对象均对应一定的频域范围;网络设备为该终端设备配置了4个载波(该4个载波均为目标载波);此时,只有所有测量对象的频域范围均在目标载波(4个目标载波中的任意一个即可)对应的频域范围内,才可认定测量对象对应的频域范围在所述目标载波对应的频域范围内;否则,若存在 一个或多个测量对象的频域范围不在目标载波对应的频域范围内,则均说明测量对象对应的频域范围不在所述目标载波对应的频域范围内。For example, the network device configures three measurement objects for the terminal device, and each measurement object corresponds to a certain frequency domain range; the network device configures 4 carriers for the terminal device (the 4 carriers are all target carriers); this When, only when the frequency domain ranges of all measurement objects are within the frequency domain range corresponding to the target carrier (any one of the four target carriers is enough), can it be determined that the frequency domain range corresponding to the measurement object is within the frequency domain range corresponding to the target carrier. Within the frequency domain range; otherwise, if the frequency domain range of one or more measurement objects is not within the frequency domain range corresponding to the target carrier, it means that the frequency domain range corresponding to the measurement object is not within the frequency domain range corresponding to the target carrier. .
可以理解的是,对于MG为pre-MG的情况而言,所述pre-MG的状态还可以是基于所述频域关系确定是否需要MG确定的;比如,所述pre-MG的状态在基于所述频域关系确定需要MG的情况下为激活状态,所述pre-MG的状态在基于所述频域关系确定不需要MG的情况下为去激活状态。这里,对于如何确定是否需要MG,可以参照上述示例,此处不再赘述。It can be understood that, for the case where the MG is a pre-MG, the state of the pre-MG can also be determined based on the frequency domain relationship to determine whether the MG is needed; for example, the state of the pre-MG is based on The state of the pre-MG is an activated state when it is determined that an MG is required based on the frequency domain relationship, and the state of the pre-MG is a deactivated state when it is determined that an MG is not required based on the frequency domain relationship. Here, as to how to determine whether an MG is required, reference can be made to the above example, which will not be described again here.
判断机制二:判断机制二与判断机制一的区别点在于两者在进行判断的过程中所针对的目标载波不同。Judgment mechanism two: The difference between judgment mechanism two and judgment mechanism one is that they target different target carriers during the judgment process.
具体来说,判断机制一中,所述目标载波为网络设备为所述终端设备配置的载波,比如,所述目标载波具体为网络设备为所述终端设备配置的所有载波,该所有载波中包含该休眠BWP所在的载波,也包括其他载波。而判断机制二中的目标载波为所述网络设备为所述终端设备配置的载波中除所述休眠BWP所对应的载波之外的其他载波。比如,该判断机制二中,所述目标载波为网络设备为所述终端设备配置的所有载波中,去除该休眠BWP所在的载波之后,剩余载波中的一个或多个。又比如,该判断机制二中的所述目标载波为网络设备为所述终端设备配置的所有载波中,去除该休眠BWP所在的载波之后的剩余载波。Specifically, in the first judgment mechanism, the target carrier is a carrier configured by the network device for the terminal device. For example, the target carrier is specifically all carriers configured by the network device for the terminal device, and all the carriers include The carrier where the dormant BWP is located also includes other carriers. The target carrier in the second judgment mechanism is a carrier other than the carrier corresponding to the dormant BWP among the carriers configured by the network device for the terminal device. For example, in the second judgment mechanism, the target carrier is one or more of the remaining carriers after removing the carrier where the dormant BWP is located among all the carriers configured by the network device for the terminal device. For another example, the target carrier in the second judgment mechanism is the remaining carrier after excluding the carrier where the dormant BWP is located among all the carriers configured by the network device for the terminal device.
举例来说,网络设备为该终端设备配置了4个载波,分别为载波1、载波2、载波3至载波4;其中,所述载波4为休眠BWP所在的载波;该判断机制二中的目标载波可以为载波1、载波2和载波3(或者为载波1至载波3中的至少一个,本申请方案对此不作限制,可基于非休眠载波所在频域与测量对象所在频域之间的频域间隔来选取目标载波);下述以目标载波为载波1、载波2和载波3为例进行说明。若网络设备为终端设备配置三个测量对象,此时,只有在所有测量对象的频域范围均落入到载波1至载波3中任一载波对应的频域范围内,才可认定测量对象对应的频域范围落入目标载波对应的频域范围内;否则,若存在一个或多个测量对象的频域范围未落入载波1至载波3中任一载波对应的频域范围内,则均说明测量对象对应的频域范围未落入目标载波对应的频域范围内。For example, the network device configures four carriers for the terminal device, namely carrier 1, carrier 2, carrier 3 to carrier 4; among which, the carrier 4 is the carrier where the dormant BWP is located; the target in the second judgment mechanism The carrier can be carrier 1, carrier 2, and carrier 3 (or at least one of carrier 1 to carrier 3. This application solution does not limit this, and can be based on the frequency between the frequency domain where the non-dormant carrier is located and the frequency domain where the measurement object is located. domain interval to select the target carrier); the following description takes the target carriers as carrier 1, carrier 2 and carrier 3 as an example. If the network device configures three measurement objects for the terminal device, at this time, only when the frequency domain ranges of all measurement objects fall within the frequency domain range corresponding to any carrier from carrier 1 to carrier 3, can the measurement object be determined to correspond to The frequency domain range falls within the frequency domain range corresponding to the target carrier; otherwise, if there are one or more measurement objects whose frequency domain range does not fall within the frequency domain range corresponding to any carrier from carrier 1 to carrier 3, then all It means that the frequency domain range corresponding to the measurement object does not fall within the frequency domain range corresponding to the target carrier.
比如,测量对象1的频域范围落入载波1对应的频域范围内,测量对象2和3的频域范围均落入载波2对应的频域范围内,此时,即可认定测量对象对应的频域范围落入所述目标载波对应的频域范围内。反之,测量对象2和3的频域范围均落入载波2对应的频域范围内,但测量对象1未落入载波1至载波3中任意一个载波对应的频域范围内,此时,均认为测量对象的频域范围未落入所述目标载波对应的频域范围内。For example, the frequency domain range of measurement object 1 falls within the frequency domain range corresponding to carrier 1, and the frequency domain ranges of measurement objects 2 and 3 both fall within the frequency domain range corresponding to carrier 2. At this time, it can be determined that the measurement object corresponds to The frequency domain range falls within the frequency domain range corresponding to the target carrier. On the contrary, the frequency domain ranges of measurement objects 2 and 3 both fall within the frequency domain range corresponding to carrier 2, but measurement object 1 does not fall within the frequency domain range corresponding to any of carriers 1 to 3. At this time, both It is considered that the frequency domain range of the measurement object does not fall within the frequency domain range corresponding to the target carrier.
对于休眠BWP方案的终端设备侧的方式二:所述MG的状态是由网络设备控制的;具体包括:For the second method on the terminal device side of the dormant BWP solution: the status of the MG is controlled by the network device; specifically includes:
所述终端设备从网络设备接收所述状态指示信息。其中,S510所述的MG的状态为基于状态指示信息确定的。The terminal device receives the status indication information from a network device. The status of the MG in S510 is determined based on the status indication information.
正如以上所述,所述终端设备只有在成功切换到休眠BWP的情况下,才需要去确认MG的状态。而确认MG的状态的时机,与接收状态指示信息的时机(该示例简称接收时 机),以及与成功解析该状态指示信息并解析得到MG的状态的时机(以下简称解析时机),可能存在如下几种情况:As mentioned above, the terminal device only needs to confirm the status of the MG when it successfully switches to the dormant BWP. The timing of confirming the status of the MG, the timing of receiving the status indication information (referred to as the receiving timing in this example), and the timing of successfully parsing the status indication information and obtaining the status of the MG (hereinafter referred to as the parsing timing) may include the following: situation:
第一,接收时机晚于成功切换时机;该情况下,所述终端设备在成功切换到休眠BWP之后,才接收到所述状态指示信息,进而解析该状态指示信息后确定出MG的状态。First, the reception timing is later than the successful switching timing; in this case, the terminal device receives the status indication information only after successfully switching to the dormant BWP, and then parses the status indication information to determine the status of the MG.
第二,接收时机早于成功切换时机;该情况下,可能存在解析时机早于状态确认时机的情况,比如,所述终端设备先接收到所述状态指示信息,并解析所述状态指示信息,得到MG的状态,此时,终端设备尚未成功切换到休眠BWP,所以,终端设备可以暂时存储解析得到的该MG的状态,并在成功切换到休眠BWP后,再去确定该MG的状态。Second, the reception timing is earlier than the successful switching timing; in this case, there may be a situation where the parsing timing is earlier than the status confirmation timing. For example, the terminal device first receives the status indication information and parses the status indication information, Obtain the status of the MG. At this time, the terminal device has not yet successfully switched to the dormant BWP. Therefore, the terminal device can temporarily store the parsed status of the MG, and then determine the status of the MG after successfully switching to the dormant BWP.
可以理解的是,本申请方案对上述时机不作具体限制,只要能够基于状态指示信息确定出MG的状态的方案均落入本申请方案的保护范围内,这里不作穷举。It can be understood that the solution of this application does not specifically limit the above-mentioned timing. As long as the solution that can determine the status of the MG based on the status indication information falls within the protection scope of the solution of this application, it is not exhaustive here.
在一示例中,所述状态指示信息用于指示所述MG的状态为去激活状态;具体地,所述状态指示信息用于指示在终端设备切换到所述休眠BWP的情况下所述MG的状态为去激活状态。此时,S510确定MG的状态则具体为:确定MG的状态为去激活状态。这里,所述状态指示信息由RRC信令携带。也就是说,通过RRC信令来配置指示去激活状态(OFF)的指示信息(也即状态指示信息)。该示例中,所述RRC信令还包括BWP的配置信息,比如,OFF指示信息置于servingCellconfig信息内。举例来说,所述网络设备在servingCellconfig信息内配置BWP的配置信息的同时,配置OFF指示信息,该OFF指示信息用于指示在终端设备切换到所述休眠BWP的情况下所述MG的状态为去激活状态。这里,该OFF指示信息在servingCellconfig信息中,可以为与BWP的配置信息处于同一层级的信息,本申请方案对此不作限制,只要在所述OFF指示信息携带于RRC信令中均在本申请方案的保护范围内。如此,便于网络控制,也更灵活。In an example, the status indication information is used to indicate that the status of the MG is a deactivated state; specifically, the status indication information is used to indicate that the MG is in a deactivated state when the terminal device switches to the dormant BWP. The status is deactivated. At this time, S510 determines the status of the MG specifically: determining that the status of the MG is the deactivated state. Here, the status indication information is carried by RRC signaling. That is to say, the indication information indicating the deactivation state (OFF) (that is, the status indication information) is configured through RRC signaling. In this example, the RRC signaling also includes BWP configuration information. For example, the OFF indication information is placed in the servingCellconfig information. For example, while configuring the configuration information of the BWP in the servingCellconfig information, the network device also configures OFF indication information. The OFF indication information is used to indicate that the status of the MG is when the terminal device switches to the dormant BWP. Deactivated state. Here, the OFF indication information in the servingCellconfig information can be information at the same level as the BWP configuration information. The solution of this application does not limit this. As long as the OFF indication information is carried in RRC signaling, it will be included in the solution of this application. within the scope of protection. This makes network control easier and more flexible.
在另一示例中,所述状态指示信息为所述休眠BWP对应的载波对应的指示信息,用于指示所述MG的状态为激活状态或去激活状态。此时,S510确定MG的状态则具体为:确定MG的状态为去激活状态或去激活状态。该示例中,所述状态指示信息为载波层面的指示信息,并通过载波层面的指示信息来指示终端设备切换到休眠BWP的情况下MG的状态。也就是说,将处于休眠状态的载波(也即休眠BWP对应的载波)看作是去激活载波,然后,配置去激活载波层面的ON/OFF指示信息,进而基于去激活载波层面的ON/OFF指示信息来确定MG的状态。此时,状态指示信息由RRC信令携带。也就是说,通过RRC信令来配置载波层面的指示信息(也即状态指示信息)。进一步地,该RRC信令可以包括BWP的配置信息,或者包括休眠BWP对应的载波的配置信息。举例来说,所述RRC信令包括BWP的配置信息以及休眠BWP对应的载波的配置信息,此时,所述休眠BWP对应的载波的配置信息与所述BWP的配置信息可以同一层级的配置信息。In another example, the status indication information is indication information corresponding to the carrier corresponding to the dormant BWP, and is used to indicate that the status of the MG is an activated state or a deactivated state. At this time, S510 determines the status of the MG specifically: determining whether the status of the MG is a deactivated state or a deactivated state. In this example, the status indication information is carrier level indication information, and the carrier level indication information is used to indicate the status of the MG when the terminal device switches to the dormant BWP. That is to say, the carrier in the dormant state (that is, the carrier corresponding to the dormant BWP) is regarded as a deactivated carrier, and then the ON/OFF indication information of the deactivated carrier layer is configured, and then the ON/OFF indication information of the deactivated carrier layer is configured. Indication information to determine the status of the MG. At this time, the status indication information is carried by RRC signaling. That is to say, the carrier layer indication information (that is, the status indication information) is configured through RRC signaling. Further, the RRC signaling may include the configuration information of the BWP, or the configuration information of the carrier corresponding to the dormant BWP. For example, the RRC signaling includes the configuration information of the BWP and the configuration information of the carrier corresponding to the dormant BWP. In this case, the configuration information of the carrier corresponding to the dormant BWP and the configuration information of the BWP can be the same level of configuration information. .
可以理解的是,以上示例中,UE配置有一个MG,或称UE对应有一个MG,对于UE配置有(或对应有)两个或两个以上的MG而言,可以参照如下示例。It can be understood that in the above example, the UE is configured with one MG, or the UE is configured with (or corresponds to) one MG. If the UE is configured with (or corresponds to) two or more MGs, refer to the following example.
在另一示例中,所述状态指示信息由RRC信令携带,而且,所述状态指示信息用于指示终端设备切换到初始DL BWP的情况下MG的状态为去激活状态。进一步地,所述状态指示信息由所述RRC信令中的与初始DL BWP对应的去激活MG列表携带,即该去激活 MG列表中记录有终端设备切换到初始DL BWP的情况下的MG的唯一标识(ID)。也就是说,该示例中,若与初始DL BWP对应的去激活MG列表中携带MG的唯一标识,则可确认当UE切换到所述初始DL BWP时,该唯一标识对应的MG的状态为去激活状态;而为UE预配置的其他MG,即其他MG ID不在该初始DL BWP对应的去激活MG列表中,则其他MG的状态默认为或协议规定为激活状态。举例来说,网络设备为UE配置有两个MG,唯一标识分别为MG1和MG2;UE接收到RRC信令,并解析得到与该初始DL BWP对应的去激活MG列表中的MG1,此时,即可确认当UE切换到初始DL BWP时,MG1对应的MG的状态为去激活状态,而MG2对应的MG的状态为默认的激活状态。In another example, the status indication information is carried by RRC signaling, and the status indication information is used to indicate that the status of the MG is the deactivated status when the terminal device switches to the initial DL BWP. Further, the status indication information is carried by the deactivated MG list corresponding to the initial DL BWP in the RRC signaling, that is, the deactivated MG list records the MGs when the terminal device switches to the initial DL BWP. Unique identification (ID). That is to say, in this example, if the deactivated MG list corresponding to the initial DL BWP carries the unique identifier of the MG, it can be confirmed that when the UE switches to the initial DL BWP, the status of the MG corresponding to the unique identifier is deactivated. Activated state; while other MGs preconfigured for the UE, that is, other MG IDs are not in the deactivated MG list corresponding to the initial DL BWP, the status of other MGs defaults to the activated state or is stipulated by the protocol. For example, the network device configures two MGs for the UE, and the unique identifiers are MG1 and MG2 respectively; the UE receives the RRC signaling and parses it to obtain MG1 in the deactivated MG list corresponding to the initial DL BWP. At this time, It can be confirmed that when the UE switches to the initial DL BWP, the state of the MG corresponding to MG1 is the deactivated state, and the state of the MG corresponding to MG2 is the default activated state.
这里,所述RRC信令还包括servingCellconfig信息,所述状态指示信息由所述servingCellconfig信息携带,也即该初始DL BWP对应的去激活MG列表还可以在servingCellconfig信息中。举例来说,所述网络设备在servingCellconfig信息内新增为初始DL BWP对应的去激活MG列表(deactivatedMeasGapListForInitialDownlinkBWP)字段,以指示当UE切换到初始DL BWP的情况下,需要将哪些MG去激活。Here, the RRC signaling also includes servingCellconfig information, and the status indication information is carried by the servingCellconfig information. That is, the deactivated MG list corresponding to the initial DL BWP can also be in the servingCellconfig information. For example, the network device adds a deactivated MG list (deactivatedMeasGapListForInitialDownlinkBWP) field corresponding to the initial DL BWP in the servingCellconfig information to indicate which MGs need to be deactivated when the UE switches to the initial DL BWP.
这里,deactivatedMeasGapListForInitialDownlinkBWP字段的格式如下:Here, the format of the deactivatedMeasGapListForInitialDownlinkBWP field is as follows:
deactivatedMeasGapListForInitialDownlinkBWP SEQUENCE(SIZE(1,maxNorfGapId-r17))of MeasGapId-r17,OPTIONAL。deactivatedMeasGapListForInitialDownlinkBWP SEQUENCE(SIZE(1,maxNorfGapId-r17))of MeasGapId-r17,OPTIONAL.
又或者,所述RRC信令还包括BWP的配置信息,此时,所述状态指示信息在所述BWP的配置信息中,也即该初始DL BWP对应的去激活MG列表还可以在所述BWP的配置信息中。或者,所述状态指示信息不在所述BWP的配置信息中。Or, the RRC signaling also includes the configuration information of the BWP. At this time, the status indication information is in the configuration information of the BWP, that is, the deactivated MG list corresponding to the initial DL BWP can also be in the BWP. configuration information. Or, the status indication information is not in the configuration information of the BWP.
又或者,所述RRC信令包括servingCellconfig信息,所述servingCellconfig信息包括BWP的配置信息,此时,所述状态指示信息在所述BWP的配置信息中,也即该初始DL BWP对应的去激活MG列表在所述BWP的配置信息中。也就是说,所述RRC信令的servingCellconfig信息中配置有BWP的配置信息,所述BWP的配置信息配置有初始DL BWP对应的去激活MG列表。Or, the RRC signaling includes servingCellconfig information, and the servingCellconfig information includes the configuration information of the BWP. At this time, the status indication information is in the configuration information of the BWP, that is, the deactivated MG corresponding to the initial DL BWP. The list is in the configuration information of the BWP. That is to say, the servingCellconfig information of the RRC signaling is configured with BWP configuration information, and the BWP configuration information is configured with a deactivated MG list corresponding to the initial DL BWP.
又或者,所述BWP的配置信息还可以不在servingCellconfig信息中,比如,RRC信令中,所述servingCellconfig信息与BWP的配置信息为同一层级的信息等,本申请方案对此不作限制。Alternatively, the BWP configuration information may not be included in the servingCellconfig information. For example, in RRC signaling, the servingCellconfig information and the BWP configuration information are information at the same level, etc. This application solution does not limit this.
需要说明的是,MG的配置信息可以在该去激活MG列表之外,而该去激活MG列表中只记录与BWP(比如,初始DL BWP)关联的MG的唯一标识,此时,只要能够通过MG的唯一标识唯一定位到MG的配置信息即可。It should be noted that the configuration information of the MG can be outside the deactivated MG list, and the deactivated MG list only records the unique identifier of the MG associated with the BWP (for example, the initial DL BWP). At this time, as long as it can pass The unique identifier of the MG can uniquely locate the configuration information of the MG.
可以理解的是,以上仅为一具体示例,实际应用中,只要RRC信令中包含该去激活MG列表,且该去激活MG列表中记录有本申请方案所述的初始DL BWP对应的MG的唯一标识,均属于本申请方案的保护范围。It can be understood that the above is only a specific example. In practical applications, as long as the deactivated MG list is included in the RRC signaling, and the deactivated MG list records the MG corresponding to the initial DL BWP described in the solution of this application. Unique identifiers all fall within the scope of protection of this application plan.
需要说明的是,UE默认或基于协议规定确定MG的状态的方式,与网络设备配置MG的状态方式,可以结合使用,此时,以网络设备配置为主来确定MG的状态。举例来说,在一示例中,在终端设备切换到初始DL BWP的情况下所述MG的状态默认或基于协议规定为激活状态,此时,若网络设备在RRC信令的去激活MG列表中配置有该初始DL BWP 对应的MG,则UE在接收到该RRC信令后,即可确定在终端设备切换到初始DL BWP的情况下所述初始DL BWP对应的MG的状态为去激活状态。否则,若网络设备未配置该初始DL BWP对应的去激活MG列表,则在终端设备切换到初始DL BWP的情况下所述MG的状态为激活状态。It should be noted that the way in which the UE determines the status of the MG by default or based on protocol regulations can be used in combination with the way in which the network device configures the status of the MG. In this case, the configuration of the network device is mainly used to determine the status of the MG. For example, in one example, when the terminal device switches to the initial DL BWP, the state of the MG is activated by default or based on protocol regulations. At this time, if the network device is in the deactivated MG list of RRC signaling If the MG corresponding to the initial DL BWP is configured, after receiving the RRC signaling, the UE can determine that the status of the MG corresponding to the initial DL BWP is the deactivated state when the terminal device switches to the initial DL BWP. Otherwise, if the network device does not configure the deactivated MG list corresponding to the initial DL BWP, then the status of the MG is the activated state when the terminal device switches to the initial DL BWP.
这里,对于当UE切换到休眠BWP的情况下,所述网络设备侧的方案具体如下:Here, when the UE switches to dormant BWP, the solution on the network device side is as follows:
图6是根据本申请一实施例的通信方法的示意性流程图四。该方法可选地可以应用于图1所示的系统,但并不仅限于此。该方法包括以下内容的至少部分内容。Figure 6 is a schematic flow chart 4 of a communication method according to an embodiment of the present application. This method can optionally be applied to the system shown in Figure 1, but is not limited thereto. The method includes at least part of the following.
S610,网络设备确定在终端设备切换到休眠带宽分段BWP的情况下测量间隔MG的状态,所述MG的状态为激活状态或去激活状态。S610: The network device determines the state of the measurement interval MG when the terminal device switches to the dormant bandwidth segment BWP, and the state of the MG is an activated state or a deactivated state.
这里,所述初始休眠BWP为SCell所对应的BWP,也即网络设备为SCell所配置的。Here, the initial sleep BWP is the BWP corresponding to the SCell, that is, the network device is configured for the SCell.
在一具体示例中,所述MG为预配置测量间隔pre-MG;所述pre-MG是对MG增强后所得;这里,所述pre-MG的状态(如激活状态或去激活状态)会随着BWP切换而改变。在另一具体示例中,所述MG还可以为通过如RRC信令等配置的网络控制小间隔(Network control small gap,NCSG)。优选的,本实施例提供的方案尤其适用于所述MG为pre-MG的场景。也即S610具体为:网络设备确定在终端设备切换到休眠BWP的情况下所述pre-MG的状态,所述pre-MG的状态为激活状态或去激活状态。In a specific example, the MG is a pre-configured measurement interval pre-MG; the pre-MG is obtained by enhancing the MG; here, the state of the pre-MG (such as activation state or deactivation state) will change with Changes when BWP switches. In another specific example, the MG may also be a Network control small gap (NCSG) configured through RRC signaling, etc. Preferably, the solution provided by this embodiment is particularly suitable for the scenario where the MG is a pre-MG. That is to say, S610 is specifically: the network device determines the state of the pre-MG when the terminal device switches to the dormant BWP, and the state of the pre-MG is the activated state or the deactivated state.
该示例中,存在几种时机,分别为:网络设备确定MG的状态的时机(该示例称为网络确认时机),网络设备配置MG的状态的时机(该示例称为网络配置时机),以及终端设备切换到休眠BWP的时机(该示例称为成功切换时机);基于此,存在如下几种情况:In this example, there are several timings, namely: the timing when the network device determines the status of the MG (this example is called the network confirmation timing), the timing when the network device configures the status of the MG (this example is called the network configuration timing), and the terminal The timing when the device switches to sleep BWP (this example is called the timing of successful switching); based on this, there are the following situations:
网络配置时机早于网络确认时机;该情况下,成功切换时机可能早于网络配置时机,或者,成功切换时机晚于网络确认时机,或者,成功切换时机处于网络配置时机与网络确认时机之间。The network configuration timing is earlier than the network confirmation timing; in this case, the successful switching timing may be earlier than the network configuration timing, or the successful switching timing may be later than the network confirmation timing, or the successful switching timing may be between the network configuration timing and the network confirmation timing.
可以理解的是,本申请方案对上述三种时机的顺序不作具体限定,实际应用中,只要能够实现S610的方案均在本申请方案的保护范围内,这里不作穷举。It can be understood that the solution of this application does not specifically limit the order of the above three timings. In practical applications, as long as the solution can realize S610, it is within the protection scope of the solution of this application, and is not exhaustive here.
本申请方案中,所述网络设备可以采用如下两种方式来确定MG的状态,具体包括:In this application solution, the network device can use the following two methods to determine the status of the MG, specifically including:
针对休眠BWP方案的网络设备侧的方式一:网络设备与终端设备约定确认方式;Method 1 for the network device side of the dormant BWP solution: the network device and the terminal device agree on the confirmation method;
第一种确认方式:默认或协议规定;所述MG的状态为网络设备默认的,或者协议规定的。比如,所述网络设备默认所述MG的状态为激活状态,或者所述网络设备默认所述MG的状态为去激活状态。又比如,所述网络设备基于协议规定确定所述MG的状态为激活状态,或者去激活状态。该方式简便,无需额外的信令指示。The first confirmation method: default or protocol stipulation; the status of the MG is the network device's default or protocol stipulation. For example, the network device defaults the state of the MG to the activated state, or the network device defaults the state of the MG to the deactivated state. For another example, the network device determines that the state of the MG is an activated state or a deactivated state based on protocol regulations. This method is simple and requires no additional signaling instructions.
可以理解的是,对于默认方式而言,为便于终端设备与网络设备所确认的MG的状态相同,所述网络设备和终端设备需要预先约定,比如终端设备和网络设备均默认MG的状态为激活状态,或者,均默认MG的状态为去激活状态。对于协议规定方式而言,终端设备和网络设备基于协议所确定的所述MG的状态相同,比如均为激活状态,或者去激活状态。It can be understood that, for the default mode, in order to facilitate the terminal device and the network device to confirm that the MG status is the same, the network device and the terminal device need to agree in advance. For example, the terminal device and the network device both default to the MG status as activated. status, or, the default MG status is deactivated. For the protocol stipulation method, the status of the MG determined by the terminal device and the network device based on the protocol is the same, for example, both are in an activated state or a deactivated state.
在一具体示例中,所述网络设备默认或基于协议确定所述pre-MG的状态为去激活状态。这里,为便于终端设备与网络设备所确认的MG的状态相同,此时,所述终端设备也 默认所述MG的状态为去激活状态。如此,灵活性更高,便于网络控制。In a specific example, the network device determines that the state of the pre-MG is a deactivated state by default or based on a protocol. Here, in order to facilitate the terminal device and the network device to confirm that the MG status is the same, at this time, the terminal device also defaults to the deactivated status of the MG. This provides greater flexibility and facilitates network control.
可以理解的是,实际应用中还可以采用其他约定方式,本申请方案对此不作限制,只要网络设备和终端设备所确认的MG的状态相同,均在本申请方案的保护范围内,这里不作穷举。It can be understood that other agreement methods can also be used in actual applications. This application solution does not limit this. As long as the status of the MG confirmed by the network device and the terminal device is the same, it is within the protection scope of this application solution. There is no limit here. Lift.
第二种确认方式:判断机制;具体包括:The second confirmation method: judgment mechanism; specifically includes:
判断机制一:所述MG的状态为基于测量对象与目标载波的频域关系确定的。进一步地,所述MG的状态为基于所述频域关系确定是否需要MG确定的。比如,所述MG的状态在基于所述频域关系确定需要MG的情况下为激活状态,所述MG的状态在基于所述频域关系确定不需要MG的情况下为去激活状态。Judgment mechanism one: The status of the MG is determined based on the frequency domain relationship between the measurement object and the target carrier. Further, the status of the MG is determined based on the frequency domain relationship to determine whether the MG is needed. For example, the state of the MG is the activated state when it is determined that the MG is needed based on the frequency domain relationship, and the state of the MG is the deactivated state when it is determined that the MG is not needed based on the frequency domain relationship.
需要说明的是,该示例在BWP切换场景下,所以,UE能力和网络指示信息均已确认,基于此,所述MG的状态在UE能力和/或网络指示信息确定的情况下,再基于测量对象与目标载波之间的频域关系确定的。It should be noted that this example is in a BWP handover scenario, so the UE capabilities and network indication information have been confirmed. Based on this, when the UE capabilities and/or network indication information are determined, the status of the MG is determined based on measurements. The frequency domain relationship between the object and the target carrier is determined.
举例来说,以SSB测量而言,在满足以下至少之一条件的情况下,SSB同频测量不需要MG:UE通过信令指示同频测量不需要MG(也即UE支持no-gap能力);SSB在激活BWP之内;当前激活BWP是初始BWP。For example, taking SSB measurement, if at least one of the following conditions is met, SSB intra-frequency measurement does not require an MG: the UE indicates through signaling that intra-frequency measurement does not require an MG (that is, the UE supports no-gap capability) ; SSB is within the active BWP; the current active BWP is the initial BWP.
基于此,对于SSB同频测量而言,若UE支持no-gap能力以及网络指示信息确认UE使用no-gap能力的情况下,则SSB同频测量不需要MG,此时,所述MG的状态即为去激活状态,无需再基于测量对象与目标载波之间频域关系而确定。否则,若UE不支持no-gap能力,则所述MG的状态需要基于测量对象与目标载波之间的频域关系来确定。Based on this, for SSB co-frequency measurement, if the UE supports no-gap capability and the network indication information confirms that the UE uses no-gap capability, then SSB co-frequency measurement does not require an MG. At this time, the status of the MG That is, it is a deactivated state, and there is no need to determine based on the frequency domain relationship between the measurement object and the target carrier. Otherwise, if the UE does not support no-gap capability, the status of the MG needs to be determined based on the frequency domain relationship between the measurement object and the target carrier.
进一步地,继续以SSB测量而言,在满足以下所有条件的情况下,SSB异频测量不需要MG:UE支持异频测量不需要MG;网络指示允许异频测量不适用MG;SSB在激活BWP之内。Further, continuing with SSB measurement, SSB inter-frequency measurement does not require MG when all the following conditions are met: UE supports inter-frequency measurement without MG; the network indicates that inter-frequency measurement is not applicable to MG; SSB activates BWP within.
基于此,对于SSB异频测量而言,若上述三个条件均满足(包括UE支持异频测量不需要MG),则SSB异频测量不需要MG,此时,所述MG的状态即为去激活状态。若UE不支持异频测量不需要MG的能力,此时,SSB异频测量必然需要MG,则所述MG的状态为激活状态,也无需基于测量对象与目标载波之间的频域关系来确定。而其余情况下,均需要基于测量对象与目标载波之间的频域关系来确定。Based on this, for SSB inter-frequency measurement, if the above three conditions are met (including that the UE supports inter-frequency measurement and does not require an MG), then the SSB inter-frequency measurement does not require an MG. At this time, the state of the MG is deactivated. Activation status. If the UE does not support inter-frequency measurement and does not require the MG capability, at this time, SSB inter-frequency measurement must require the MG, and the state of the MG is the active state and does not need to be determined based on the frequency domain relationship between the measurement object and the target carrier. . In other cases, it needs to be determined based on the frequency domain relationship between the measurement object and the target carrier.
可以理解的是,以上仅是示例性说明,还可能有其他情况,此处不作穷举。It can be understood that the above is only an illustrative description, and there may be other situations, which are not exhaustive here.
也就是说,在UE能力和/或网络指示信息确定的情况下,所述网络设备基于测量对象与目标载波之间的频域关系确定MG的状态;进一步地,所述网络设备基于所述频域关系确定是否需要MG,再基于是否需要MG确定所述MG的状态,比如,所述网络设备基于所述频域关系确定需要MG的情况下,确定所述MG的状态为激活状态;所述网络设备基于所述频域关系确定不需要MG的情况下,确定所述MG的状态为去激活状态。That is to say, when the UE capability and/or network indication information is determined, the network device determines the status of the MG based on the frequency domain relationship between the measurement object and the target carrier; further, the network device determines the status of the MG based on the frequency domain relationship. The domain relationship determines whether an MG is needed, and then determines the status of the MG based on whether the MG is needed. For example, when the network device determines that an MG is needed based on the frequency domain relationship, it determines that the status of the MG is an active state; When the network device determines that the MG is not needed based on the frequency domain relationship, it determines that the state of the MG is a deactivated state.
可以理解是,该示例中,所述目标载波为网络设备为所述终端设备配置的载波。比如,所述目标载波为网络设备为所述终端设备配置的载波中的至少部分载波,这里,该至少部分载波包括休眠BWP所在的载波;或者,所述目标载波为网络设备为所述终端设备配置的所有载波,包含休眠BWP所在的载波。It can be understood that in this example, the target carrier is a carrier configured by the network device for the terminal device. For example, the target carrier is at least part of the carriers configured by the network device for the terminal device. Here, the at least part of the carriers includes the carrier where the dormant BWP is located; or the target carrier is the network device for the terminal device. All configured carriers, including the carrier where the dormant BWP is located.
需要说明的是,所述的测量对象与目标载波之间的频域关系可以具体为以下关系中的至少一种:It should be noted that the frequency domain relationship between the measurement object and the target carrier may be specifically at least one of the following relationships:
第一种频域关系:测量对象对应的频域范围,与目标载波的频域范围之间的频域关系。此时,所述目标载波为去激活载波或休眠载波,所述目标载波的频域范围指目标载波的整个频域范围。The first frequency domain relationship: the frequency domain relationship between the frequency domain range corresponding to the measurement object and the frequency domain range of the target carrier. At this time, the target carrier is a deactivated carrier or a dormant carrier, and the frequency domain range of the target carrier refers to the entire frequency domain range of the target carrier.
第二种频域关系:测量对象对应的频域范围,与目标载波中激活BWP所对应的频域范围之间的频域关系。The second frequency domain relationship: the frequency domain relationship between the frequency domain range corresponding to the measurement object and the frequency domain range corresponding to the activated BWP in the target carrier.
第三种频域关系:测量对象对应的频域范围,与目标载波中所配置的任意一个或多个BWP所对应的频域范围之间的频域关系。此时,所述目标载波为休眠载波。The third frequency domain relationship: the frequency domain relationship between the frequency domain range corresponding to the measurement object and the frequency domain range corresponding to any one or more BWPs configured in the target carrier. At this time, the target carrier is a dormant carrier.
基于此,所述目标载波对应的频域范围可以为:目标载波自身的频域范围(也即目标载波的整个频域范围),或者目标载波中激活BWP对应的频域范围,或者,目标载波所配置的一个BWP所对应的频域范围,或者,目标载波所配置的多个(两个或两个以上)BWP所对应的频域范围的组合。为便于描述,下述以目标载波对应的频域范围来指以上所述的任意一种可能。Based on this, the frequency domain range corresponding to the target carrier can be: the frequency domain range of the target carrier itself (that is, the entire frequency domain range of the target carrier), or the frequency domain range corresponding to the activated BWP in the target carrier, or the target carrier The frequency domain range corresponding to one configured BWP, or a combination of frequency domain ranges corresponding to multiple (two or more) BWPs configured for the target carrier. For the convenience of description, any of the above possibilities are referred to below in terms of the frequency domain range corresponding to the target carrier.
进一步地,该示例中,在测量对象对应的频域范围在所述目标载波对应的频域范围内的情况下,不需要MG;此时,网络设备可以确定MG的状态为去激活状态。否则,在测量对象对应的频域范围不在所述目标载波对应的频域范围内的情况下,则需要MG;此时,网络设备可以确定MG的状态为激活状态。Further, in this example, when the frequency domain range corresponding to the measurement object is within the frequency domain range corresponding to the target carrier, the MG is not required; at this time, the network device can determine that the state of the MG is a deactivated state. Otherwise, when the frequency domain range corresponding to the measurement object is not within the frequency domain range corresponding to the target carrier, an MG is required; at this time, the network device can determine that the state of the MG is an active state.
这里,可以理解的是,测量对象对应的频域范围在目标载波对应的至少一个频域范围,如在目标载波的频域范围内,或在目标载波中激活BWP所对应的频域范围内,或者在目标载波所配置的至少一个BWP对应的频域范围内等,则均可确认不需要MG。Here, it can be understood that the frequency domain range corresponding to the measurement object is at least one frequency domain range corresponding to the target carrier, such as within the frequency domain range of the target carrier, or within the frequency domain range corresponding to activating BWP in the target carrier, Or within the frequency domain range corresponding to at least one BWP configured on the target carrier, etc., it can be confirmed that MG is not required.
相应的,测量对象对应的频域范围不在目标载波对应的所有频域范围内,如不在目标载波的频域范围内,以及不在目标载波中激活BWP所对应的频域范围内,以及不在目标载波所配置的至少一个BWP的频域范围内等,则确认需要MG。Correspondingly, the frequency domain range corresponding to the measurement object is not within all frequency domain ranges corresponding to the target carrier, such as not within the frequency domain range of the target carrier, and not within the frequency domain range corresponding to the activation of BWP in the target carrier, and not within the target carrier. Within the frequency domain range of at least one configured BWP, etc., it is confirmed that an MG is required.
举例来说,网络设备为终端设备配置三个测量对象,每个测量对象均对应一定的频域范围;网络设备为该终端设备配置了4个载波(该4个载波均为目标载波);此时,只有所有测量对象的频域范围均在目标载波(4个载波中的任意一个载波即可)对应的频域范围内,才可认定测量对象对应的频域范围在所述目标载波对应的频域范围内;否则,若存在一个或多个测量对象的频域范围不在目标载波对应的频域范围内,则均说明测量对象对应的频域范围不在所述目标载波对应的频域范围内。For example, the network device configures three measurement objects for the terminal device, and each measurement object corresponds to a certain frequency domain range; the network device configures 4 carriers for the terminal device (the 4 carriers are all target carriers); this When, only when the frequency domain range of all measurement objects is within the frequency domain range corresponding to the target carrier (any one of the four carriers is enough), can it be determined that the frequency domain range corresponding to the measurement object is within the frequency domain range corresponding to the target carrier. Within the frequency domain range; otherwise, if the frequency domain range of one or more measurement objects is not within the frequency domain range corresponding to the target carrier, it means that the frequency domain range corresponding to the measurement object is not within the frequency domain range corresponding to the target carrier. .
可以理解的是,对于MG为pre-MG的情况而言,所述pre-MG的状态还可以是基于所述频域关系确定是否需要MG确定的;比如,所述pre-MG的状态在基于所述频域关系确定需要MG的情况下为激活状态,所述pre-MG的状态在基于所述频域关系确定不需要MG的情况下为去激活状态。这里,对于如何确定是否需要MG,可以参照上述示例,此处不再赘述。It can be understood that, for the case where the MG is a pre-MG, the state of the pre-MG can also be determined based on the frequency domain relationship to determine whether the MG is needed; for example, the state of the pre-MG is based on The state of the pre-MG is an activated state when it is determined that an MG is required based on the frequency domain relationship, and the state of the pre-MG is a deactivated state when it is determined that an MG is not required based on the frequency domain relationship. Here, as to how to determine whether an MG is required, reference can be made to the above example, which will not be described again here.
判断机制二:判断机制二与判断机制一的区别点在于两者在进行判断的过程中所针对的目标载波不同。Judgment mechanism two: The difference between judgment mechanism two and judgment mechanism one is that they target different target carriers during the judgment process.
具体来说,判断机制一中,所述目标载波为网络设备为所述终端设备配置的载波,比如,所述目标载波具体为网络设备为所述终端设备配置的所有载波,该所有载波中包含该休眠BWP所在的载波,也包括其他载波。而判断机制二中的目标载波为所述网络设备为所述终端设备配置的载波中除所述休眠BWP所对应的载波之外的其他载波。比如,该判断机制二中,所述目标载波为网络设备为所述终端设备配置的所有载波中,去除该休眠BWP所在的载波之后,剩余载波中的一个或多个。优选的,该判断机制二中的所述目标载波为网络设备为所述终端设备配置的所有载波中,去除该休眠BWP所在的载波之后的剩余载波(也可称为其他载波)。具体示例可参照UE的判断机制二的示例,此处不再赘述。Specifically, in the first judgment mechanism, the target carrier is a carrier configured by the network device for the terminal device. For example, the target carrier is specifically all carriers configured by the network device for the terminal device, and all the carriers include The carrier where the dormant BWP is located also includes other carriers. The target carrier in the second judgment mechanism is a carrier other than the carrier corresponding to the dormant BWP among the carriers configured by the network device for the terminal device. For example, in the second judgment mechanism, the target carrier is one or more of the remaining carriers after removing the carrier where the dormant BWP is located among all the carriers configured by the network device for the terminal device. Preferably, the target carrier in the second judgment mechanism is the remaining carrier (which may also be called other carriers) after removing the carrier where the dormant BWP is located among all the carriers configured by the network device for the terminal device. For a specific example, refer to the example of the second judgment mechanism of the UE, which will not be described again here.
针对休眠BWP方案的网络设备侧的方式二:网络设备控制MG的状态。Method 2 on the network device side of the dormant BWP solution: the network device controls the status of the MG.
所述网络设备发送状态指示信息。The network device sends status indication information.
在一示例中,在S610之后,所述网络设备发送状态指示信息。也即状态指示信息的发送时机,晚于网络确认MG的状态的时机。In an example, after S610, the network device sends status indication information. That is, the timing of sending the status indication information is later than the timing of the network confirming the status of the MG.
在一示例中,所述状态指示信息用于指示所述MG的状态为去激活状态;具体地,所述状态指示信息用于指示在终端设备切换到所述休眠BWP的情况下所述MG的状态为去激活状态。这里,所述状态指示信息由RRC信令携带。也就是说,通过RRC信令来配置指示去激活状态(OFF)的指示信息(也即状态指示信息)。该示例中,所述RRC信令还包括BWP的配置信息,比如,OFF指示信息置于servingCellconfig信息内。举例来说,所述网络设备在servingCellconfig信息内配置BWP的配置信息的同时,配置OFF指示信息,该OFF指示信息用于指示在终端设备切换到所述休眠BWP的情况下所述MG的状态为去激活状态。这里,该OFF指示信息在servingCellconfig信息中,可以为与BWP的配置信息处于同一层级的信息,本申请方案对此不作限制,只要在所述OFF指示信息携带于RRC信令中均在本申请方案的保护范围内。如此,便于网络控制,也更灵活。In an example, the status indication information is used to indicate that the status of the MG is a deactivated state; specifically, the status indication information is used to indicate that the MG is in a deactivated state when the terminal device switches to the dormant BWP. The status is deactivated. Here, the status indication information is carried by RRC signaling. That is to say, the indication information indicating the deactivation state (OFF) (that is, the status indication information) is configured through RRC signaling. In this example, the RRC signaling also includes BWP configuration information. For example, the OFF indication information is placed in the servingCellconfig information. For example, while configuring the configuration information of the BWP in the servingCellconfig information, the network device also configures OFF indication information. The OFF indication information is used to indicate that the status of the MG is when the terminal device switches to the dormant BWP. Deactivated state. Here, the OFF indication information in the servingCellconfig information can be information at the same level as the BWP configuration information. The solution of this application does not limit this. As long as the OFF indication information is carried in RRC signaling, it will be included in the solution of this application. within the scope of protection. This makes network control easier and more flexible.
在另一示例中,所述状态指示信息为所述休眠BWP对应的载波对应的指示信息,用于指示所述MG的状态为激活状态或去激活状态。该示例中,所述状态指示信息为载波层面的指示信息,并通过载波层面的指示信息来指示终端设备切换到休眠BWP的情况下MG的状态。也就是说,将处于休眠状态的载波(也即休眠BWP对应的载波)看作是去激活载波,然后,配置去激活载波层面的ON/OFF指示信息,进而基于去激活载波层面的ON/OFF指示信息来确定MG的状态。此时,状态指示信息由RRC信令携带。也就是说,通过RRC信令来配置载波层面的指示信息(也即状态指示信息)。进一步地,该RRC信令可以包括BWP的配置信息,或者包括休眠BWP对应的载波的配置信息。举例来说,所述RRC信令包括BWP的配置信息以及休眠BWP对应的载波的配置信息,此时,所述休眠BWP对应的载波的配置信息与所述BWP的配置信息可以为同一层级的配置信息。In another example, the status indication information is indication information corresponding to the carrier corresponding to the dormant BWP, and is used to indicate that the status of the MG is an activated state or a deactivated state. In this example, the status indication information is carrier level indication information, and the carrier level indication information is used to indicate the status of the MG when the terminal device switches to the dormant BWP. That is to say, the carrier in the dormant state (that is, the carrier corresponding to the dormant BWP) is regarded as a deactivated carrier, and then the ON/OFF indication information of the deactivated carrier layer is configured, and then the ON/OFF indication information of the deactivated carrier layer is configured. Indication information to determine the status of the MG. At this time, the status indication information is carried by RRC signaling. That is to say, the carrier layer indication information (that is, the status indication information) is configured through RRC signaling. Further, the RRC signaling may include the configuration information of the BWP, or the configuration information of the carrier corresponding to the dormant BWP. For example, the RRC signaling includes the configuration information of the BWP and the configuration information of the carrier corresponding to the dormant BWP. In this case, the configuration information of the carrier corresponding to the dormant BWP and the configuration information of the BWP may be the same level of configuration. information.
可以理解的是,以上示例中,UE配置有一个MG,或称UE对应有一个MG,对于UE配置有(或对应有)两个或两个以上的MG而言,可以参照如下示例。It can be understood that in the above example, the UE is configured with one MG, or the UE is configured with (or corresponds to) one MG. If the UE is configured with (or corresponds to) two or more MGs, refer to the following example.
在另一示例中,所述状态指示信息由RRC信令携带,而且,所述状态指示信息用于指示终端设备切换到初始DL BWP的情况下MG的状态为去激活状态。进一步地,所述状态指示信息由所述RRC信令中的与初始DL BWP对应的去激活MG列表携带,即该去激活 MG列表中记录有终端设备切换到初始DL BWP的情况下的MG的唯一标识(ID)。也就是说,该示例中,若与初始DL BWP对应的去激活MG列表中携带MG的唯一标识,则可确认当UE切换到所述初始DL BWP时,该唯一标识对应的MG的状态为去激活状态;而为UE预配置的其他MG,即其他MG ID不在该初始DL BWP对应的去激活MG列表中,则其他MG的状态默认为或协议规定为激活状态。举例来说,网络设备为UE配置有两个MG,唯一标识分别为MG1和MG2;UE接收到RRC信令,并解析得到与该初始DL BWP对应的去激活MG列表中的MG1,此时,即可确认当UE切换到初始DL BWP时,MG1对应的MG的状态为去激活状态,而MG2对应的MG的状态为默认的激活状态。In another example, the status indication information is carried by RRC signaling, and the status indication information is used to indicate that the status of the MG is the deactivated status when the terminal device switches to the initial DL BWP. Further, the status indication information is carried by the deactivated MG list corresponding to the initial DL BWP in the RRC signaling, that is, the deactivated MG list records the MGs when the terminal device switches to the initial DL BWP. Unique identification (ID). That is to say, in this example, if the deactivated MG list corresponding to the initial DL BWP carries the unique identifier of the MG, it can be confirmed that when the UE switches to the initial DL BWP, the status of the MG corresponding to the unique identifier is deactivated. Activated state; while other MGs preconfigured for the UE, that is, other MG IDs are not in the deactivated MG list corresponding to the initial DL BWP, the status of other MGs defaults to the activated state or is stipulated by the protocol. For example, the network device configures two MGs for the UE, and the unique identifiers are MG1 and MG2 respectively; the UE receives the RRC signaling and parses it to obtain MG1 in the deactivated MG list corresponding to the initial DL BWP. At this time, It can be confirmed that when the UE switches to the initial DL BWP, the state of the MG corresponding to MG1 is the deactivated state, and the state of the MG corresponding to MG2 is the default activated state.
这里,所述RRC信令还包括servingCellconfig信息,所述状态指示信息由所述servingCellconfig信息携带,也即该初始DL BWP对应的去激活MG列表还可以在servingCellconfig信息中。举例来说,所述网络设备在servingCellconfig信息内新增为初始DL BWP对应的去激活MG列表(deactivatedMeasGapListForInitialDownlinkBWP)字段,以指示当UE切换到初始DL BWP的情况下,需要将哪些MG去激活。Here, the RRC signaling also includes servingCellconfig information, and the status indication information is carried by the servingCellconfig information. That is, the deactivated MG list corresponding to the initial DL BWP can also be in the servingCellconfig information. For example, the network device adds a deactivated MG list (deactivatedMeasGapListForInitialDownlinkBWP) field corresponding to the initial DL BWP in the servingCellconfig information to indicate which MGs need to be deactivated when the UE switches to the initial DL BWP.
这里,deactivatedMeasGapListForInitialDownlinkBWP字段的格式如下:Here, the format of the deactivatedMeasGapListForInitialDownlinkBWP field is as follows:
deactivatedMeasGapListForInitialDownlinkBWP SEQUENCE(SIZE(1,maxNorfGapId-r17))of MeasGapId-r17,OPTIONAL。deactivatedMeasGapListForInitialDownlinkBWP SEQUENCE(SIZE(1,maxNorfGapId-r17))of MeasGapId-r17,OPTIONAL.
又或者,所述RRC信令还包括BWP的配置信息,此时,所述状态指示信息在所述BWP的配置信息中,也即该初始DL BWP对应的去激活MG列表还可以在所述BWP的配置信息中。或者,所述状态指示信息不在所述BWP的配置信息中。Or, the RRC signaling also includes the configuration information of the BWP. At this time, the status indication information is in the configuration information of the BWP, that is, the deactivated MG list corresponding to the initial DL BWP can also be in the BWP. configuration information. Or, the status indication information is not in the configuration information of the BWP.
又或者,所述RRC信令包括servingCellconfig信息,所述servingCellconfig信息包括BWP的配置信息,此时,所述状态指示信息在所述BWP的配置信息中,也即该初始DL BWP对应的去激活MG列表在所述BWP的配置信息中。也就是说,所述RRC信令的servingCellconfig信息中配置有BWP的配置信息,所述BWP的配置信息配置有初始DL BWP对应的去激活MG列表。Or, the RRC signaling includes servingCellconfig information, and the servingCellconfig information includes the configuration information of the BWP. At this time, the status indication information is in the configuration information of the BWP, that is, the deactivated MG corresponding to the initial DL BWP. The list is in the configuration information of the BWP. That is to say, the servingCellconfig information of the RRC signaling is configured with BWP configuration information, and the BWP configuration information is configured with a deactivated MG list corresponding to the initial DL BWP.
又或者,所述BWP的配置信息还可以不在servingCellconfig信息中,比如,RRC信令中,所述servingCellconfig信息与BWP的配置信息为同一层级的信息等,本申请方案对此不作限制。Alternatively, the BWP configuration information may not be included in the servingCellconfig information. For example, in RRC signaling, the servingCellconfig information and the BWP configuration information are information at the same level, etc. This application solution does not limit this.
需要说明的是,MG的配置信息可以在该去激活MG列表之外,而该去激活MG列表中只记录与BWP(比如,初始DL BWP)关联的MG的唯一标识,此时,只要能够通过MG的唯一标识唯一定位到MG的配置信息即可。It should be noted that the configuration information of the MG can be outside the deactivated MG list, and the deactivated MG list only records the unique identifier of the MG associated with the BWP (for example, the initial DL BWP). At this time, as long as it can pass The unique identifier of the MG can uniquely locate the configuration information of the MG.
可以理解的是,以上仅为一具体示例,实际应用中,只要RRC信令中包含该去激活MG列表,且该去激活MG列表中记录有本申请方案所述的初始DL BWP对应的MG的唯一标识,均属于本申请方案的保护范围。It can be understood that the above is only a specific example. In practical applications, as long as the deactivated MG list is included in the RRC signaling, and the deactivated MG list records the MG corresponding to the initial DL BWP described in the solution of this application. Unique identifiers all fall within the scope of protection of this application plan.
图7是根据本申请一实施例的终端设备的示意性框图一。该终端设备700可以包括:Figure 7 is a schematic block diagram 1 of a terminal device according to an embodiment of the present application. The terminal device 700 may include:
第一确定单元710,用于切换到初始下行DL带宽分段BWP的情况下,确定测量间隔MG的状态,所述MG的状态为激活状态或去激活状态。The first determining unit 710 is configured to determine the state of the measurement interval MG when switching to the initial downlink DL bandwidth segment BWP, and the state of the MG is an activated state or a deactivated state.
在一种实施方式中,所述MG的状态为基于状态指示信息确定的;其中,所述状态指 示信息用于指示所述MG的状态为激活状态或去激活状态。In one implementation, the status of the MG is determined based on status indication information; wherein the status indication information is used to indicate that the status of the MG is an activated state or a deactivated state.
在一种实施方式中,所述终端设备700还包括:第一接收单元,用于从网络设备接收所述状态指示信息。In one implementation, the terminal device 700 further includes: a first receiving unit configured to receive the status indication information from a network device.
在一种实施方式中,所述状态指示信息由系统消息携带。In one implementation, the status indication information is carried by a system message.
在一种实施方式中,所述系统消息还包括:所述初始DL BWP的配置信息。In one implementation, the system message further includes: configuration information of the initial DL BWP.
在一种实施方式中,所述状态指示信息由无线资源控制RRC信令携带。In an implementation manner, the status indication information is carried by Radio Resource Control (RRC) signaling.
在一种实施方式中,所述状态指示信息由所述RRC信令中的服务小区配置信息携带。In an implementation manner, the status indication information is carried by the serving cell configuration information in the RRC signaling.
在一种实施方式中,所述状态指示信息由所述RRC信令中的BWP的配置信息携带。In an implementation manner, the status indication information is carried by BWP configuration information in the RRC signaling.
在一种实施方式中,所述MG的状态为默认的,或者协议规定的。In an implementation manner, the state of the MG is default or specified by the protocol.
在一种实施方式中,所述测量间隔MG为预配置测量间隔pre-MG。In one implementation, the measurement interval MG is a preconfigured measurement interval pre-MG.
本申请实施例的终端设备700能够实现前述的方法实施例中的终端设备的对应功能。该终端设备700中的各个模块(子模块、单元或组件等)对应的流程、功能、实现方式以及有益效果,可参见上述方法实施例中的对应描述,在此不再赘述。需要说明,关于申请实施例的终端设备700中的各个模块(子模块、单元或组件等)所描述的功能,可以由不同的模块(子模块、单元或组件等)实现,也可以由同一个模块(子模块、单元或组件等)实现。The terminal device 700 in the embodiment of the present application can implement the corresponding functions of the terminal device in the foregoing method embodiment. For the corresponding processes, functions, implementation methods and beneficial effects of each module (sub-module, unit or component, etc.) in the terminal device 700, please refer to the corresponding description in the above method embodiment, and will not be described again here. It should be noted that the functions described for each module (sub-module, unit or component, etc.) in the terminal device 700 of the application embodiment can be implemented by different modules (sub-module, unit or component, etc.), or can be implemented by the same module. Module (submodule, unit or component, etc.) implementation.
图8是根据本申请一实施例的网络设备的示意性框图。该网络设备800可以包括:Figure 8 is a schematic block diagram of a network device according to an embodiment of the present application. The network device 800 may include:
第二确定单元810,用于确定在终端设备切换到初始下行DL带宽分段BWP的情况下测量间隔MG的状态,所述MG的状态为激活状态或去激活状态。The second determining unit 810 is configured to determine the state of the measurement interval MG when the terminal device switches to the initial downlink DL bandwidth segment BWP, and the state of the MG is an activated state or a deactivated state.
在一种实施方式中,还包括:In one embodiment, it also includes:
第一发送单元,用于发送状态指示信息,其中,所述状态指示信息用于指示所述MG的状态为激活状态或去激活状态。The first sending unit is configured to send status indication information, where the status indication information is used to indicate that the status of the MG is an activation state or a deactivation state.
在一种实施方式中,所述状态指示信息由系统消息携带。In one implementation, the status indication information is carried by a system message.
在一种实施方式中,所述系统消息还包括:所述初始DL BWP的配置信息。In one implementation, the system message further includes: configuration information of the initial DL BWP.
在一种实施方式中,所述状态指示信息由无线资源控制RRC信令携带。In an implementation manner, the status indication information is carried by Radio Resource Control (RRC) signaling.
在一种实施方式中,所述状态指示信息由所述RRC信令中的服务小区配置信息携带。In an implementation manner, the status indication information is carried by the serving cell configuration information in the RRC signaling.
在一种实施方式中,所述状态指示信息由所述RRC信令中的BWP的配置信息携带。In an implementation manner, the status indication information is carried by BWP configuration information in the RRC signaling.
在一种实施方式中,所述MG的状态为默认的,或者协议规定的。In an implementation manner, the state of the MG is default or specified by the protocol.
在一种实施方式中,所述测量间隔MG为预配置测量间隔pre-MG。In one implementation, the measurement interval MG is a preconfigured measurement interval pre-MG.
本申请实施例的网络设备800能够实现前述的方法实施例中的网络设备的对应功能。该网络设备800中的各个模块(子模块、单元或组件等)对应的流程、功能、实现方式以及有益效果,可参见上述方法实施例中的对应描述,在此不再赘述。需要说明,关于申请实施例的网络设备800中的各个模块(子模块、单元或组件等)所描述的功能,可以由不同的模块(子模块、单元或组件等)实现,也可以由同一个模块(子模块、单元或组件等)实现。The network device 800 in the embodiment of the present application can implement the corresponding functions of the network device in the foregoing method embodiment. For the corresponding processes, functions, implementation methods and beneficial effects of each module (sub-module, unit or component, etc.) in the network device 800, please refer to the corresponding description in the above method embodiment, and will not be described again here. It should be noted that the functions described for each module (sub-module, unit or component, etc.) in the network device 800 of the application embodiment can be implemented by different modules (sub-module, unit or component, etc.), or can be implemented by the same Module (submodule, unit or component, etc.) implementation.
图9是根据本申请一实施例的终端设备的示意性框图二。该终端设备900可以包括:Figure 9 is a second schematic block diagram of a terminal device according to an embodiment of the present application. The terminal device 900 may include:
第三确定单元910,用于切换到休眠带宽分段BWP的情况下,确定测量间隔MG的 状态,所述MG的状态为激活状态或去激活状态。The third determination unit 910 is configured to determine the state of the measurement interval MG when switching to the dormant bandwidth segment BWP, and the state of the MG is an activated state or a deactivated state.
在一种实施方式中,所述MG的状态为基于测量对象与目标载波的频域关系确定的。In one implementation, the status of the MG is determined based on the frequency domain relationship between the measurement object and the target carrier.
在一种实施方式中,所述MG的状态为基于所述频域关系确定是否需要MG确定的。In one implementation, the status of the MG is determined based on the frequency domain relationship to determine whether an MG is required.
在一种实施方式中,所述MG的状态在基于所述频域关系确定需要MG的情况下为激活状态。In one implementation, the state of the MG is an active state when it is determined that an MG is required based on the frequency domain relationship.
在一种实施方式中,所述MG的状态在基于所述频域关系确定不需要MG的情况下为去激活状态。In one implementation, the state of the MG is a deactivated state when it is determined that the MG is not needed based on the frequency domain relationship.
在一种实施方式中,所述目标载波为网络设备为所述终端设备配置的载波。In an implementation manner, the target carrier is a carrier configured by a network device for the terminal device.
在一种实施方式中,所述目标载波为网络设备为所述终端设备配置的载波中除所述休眠BWP所对应的载波之外的其他载波。In one implementation, the target carrier is a carrier other than the carrier corresponding to the dormant BWP among the carriers configured by the network device for the terminal device.
在一种实施方式中,所述MG的状态为基于状态指示信息确定的。In one implementation, the status of the MG is determined based on status indication information.
在一种实施方式中,还包括:In one embodiment, it also includes:
第二接收单元,用于从网络设备接收所述状态指示信息。The second receiving unit is configured to receive the status indication information from the network device.
在一种实施方式中,所述状态指示信息用于指示所述MG的状态为去激活状态。In an implementation manner, the status indication information is used to indicate that the status of the MG is a deactivated state.
在一种实施方式中,所述状态指示信息为所述休眠BWP对应的载波对应的指示信息,用于指示所述MG的状态为激活状态或去激活状态。In one implementation, the status indication information is indication information corresponding to the carrier corresponding to the dormant BWP, and is used to indicate that the status of the MG is an activated state or a deactivated state.
在一种实施方式中,所述状态指示信息由无线资源控制RRC信令携带。In an implementation manner, the status indication information is carried by Radio Resource Control (RRC) signaling.
在一种实施方式中,所述状态指示信息由所述RRC信令中的BWP的配置信息携带。In an implementation manner, the status indication information is carried by BWP configuration information in the RRC signaling.
在一种实施方式中,所述MG的状态为默认的,或者协议规定的。In an implementation manner, the state of the MG is default or specified by the protocol.
在一种实施方式中,所述MG的状态默认或协议规定为去激活状态。In one implementation, the state of the MG is deactivated by default or specified by the protocol.
在一种实施方式中,所述测量间隔MG为预配置测量间隔pre-MG。In one implementation, the measurement interval MG is a preconfigured measurement interval pre-MG.
本申请实施例的终端设备900能够实现前述的方法实施例中的终端设备的对应功能。该终端设备900中的各个模块(子模块、单元或组件等)对应的流程、功能、实现方式以及有益效果,可参见上述方法实施例中的对应描述,在此不再赘述。需要说明,关于申请实施例的终端设备900中的各个模块(子模块、单元或组件等)所描述的功能,可以由不同的模块(子模块、单元或组件等)实现,也可以由同一个模块(子模块、单元或组件等)实现。The terminal device 900 in the embodiment of the present application can implement the corresponding functions of the terminal device in the foregoing method embodiment. For the corresponding processes, functions, implementation methods and beneficial effects of each module (sub-module, unit or component, etc.) in the terminal device 900, please refer to the corresponding description in the above method embodiment, and will not be described again here. It should be noted that the functions described for each module (sub-module, unit or component, etc.) in the terminal device 900 in the embodiment of the application can be implemented by different modules (sub-module, unit or component, etc.), or can be implemented by the same module. Module (submodule, unit or component, etc.) implementation.
图10是根据本申请一实施例的网络设备的示意性框图。该网络设备1000可以包括:Figure 10 is a schematic block diagram of a network device according to an embodiment of the present application. The network device 1000 may include:
第四确定单元1010,用于确定在终端设备切换到休眠带宽分段BWP的情况下测量间隔MG的状态,所述MG的状态为激活状态或去激活状态。The fourth determining unit 1010 is configured to determine the state of the measurement interval MG when the terminal device switches to the dormant bandwidth segment BWP, and the state of the MG is an activated state or a deactivated state.
在一种实施方式中,其中,所述MG的状态为基于测量对象与目标载波的频域关系确定的。In one implementation, the status of the MG is determined based on the frequency domain relationship between the measurement object and the target carrier.
在一种实施方式中,所述MG的状态为基于所述频域关系确定是否需要MG确定的。In one implementation, the status of the MG is determined based on the frequency domain relationship to determine whether an MG is required.
在一种实施方式中,所述MG的状态在基于所述频域关系确定需要MG的情况下为激活状态。In one implementation, the state of the MG is an active state when it is determined that an MG is required based on the frequency domain relationship.
在一种实施方式中,所述MG的状态在基于所述频域关系确定不需要MG的情况下为去激活状态。In one implementation, the state of the MG is a deactivated state when it is determined that the MG is not needed based on the frequency domain relationship.
在一种实施方式中,所述目标载波为网络设备为所述终端设备配置的载波。In an implementation manner, the target carrier is a carrier configured by a network device for the terminal device.
在一种实施方式中,所述目标载波为网络设备为所述终端设备配置的载波中除所述休眠BWP所对应的载波之外的其他载波。In one implementation, the target carrier is a carrier other than the carrier corresponding to the dormant BWP among the carriers configured by the network device for the terminal device.
在一种实施方式中,还包括:In one embodiment, it also includes:
第二发送单元,用于发送状态指示信息,其中,所述状态指示信息用于指示所述MG的状态为去激活状态。The second sending unit is configured to send status indication information, where the status indication information is used to indicate that the status of the MG is a deactivated state.
在一种实施方式中,还包括:In one embodiment, it also includes:
第三发送单元,用于发送状态指示信息,其中,所述状态指示信息为所述休眠BWP对应的载波对应的指示信息,用于指示在终端设备切换到休眠BWP的情况下所述MG的状态为激活状态或去激活状态。The third sending unit is configured to send status indication information, where the status indication information is indication information corresponding to the carrier corresponding to the dormant BWP, and is used to indicate the status of the MG when the terminal device switches to the dormant BWP. is activated or deactivated.
在一种实施方式中,所述状态指示信息由无线资源控制RRC信令携带。In an implementation manner, the status indication information is carried by Radio Resource Control (RRC) signaling.
在一种实施方式中,所述状态指示信息由所述RRC信令中的BWP的配置信息携带。In an implementation manner, the status indication information is carried by BWP configuration information in the RRC signaling.
在一种实施方式中,所述MG的状态为默认的,或者协议规定的。In an implementation manner, the state of the MG is default or specified by the protocol.
在一种实施方式中,所述MG的状态默认或协议规定为去激活状态。In one implementation, the state of the MG is deactivated by default or specified by the protocol.
在一种实施方式中,所述测量间隔MG为预配置测量间隔pre-MG。In one implementation, the measurement interval MG is a preconfigured measurement interval pre-MG.
本申请实施例的网络设备1000能够实现前述的方法实施例中的网络设备的对应功能。该网络设备1000中的各个模块(子模块、单元或组件等)对应的流程、功能、实现方式以及有益效果,可参见上述方法实施例中的对应描述,在此不再赘述。需要说明,关于申请实施例的网络设备1000中的各个模块(子模块、单元或组件等)所描述的功能,可以由不同的模块(子模块、单元或组件等)实现,也可以由同一个模块(子模块、单元或组件等)实现。The network device 1000 in the embodiment of the present application can implement the corresponding functions of the network device in the foregoing method embodiment. For the corresponding processes, functions, implementation methods and beneficial effects of each module (sub-module, unit or component, etc.) in the network device 1000, please refer to the corresponding description in the above method embodiment, and will not be described again here. It should be noted that the functions described for each module (sub-module, unit or component, etc.) in the network device 1000 of the application embodiment can be implemented by different modules (sub-module, unit or component, etc.), or can be implemented by the same Module (submodule, unit or component, etc.) implementation.
图11是根据本申请实施例的通信设备示意性结构图。该通信设备1100包括处理器1110,处理器1110可以从存储器中调用并运行计算机程序,以使通信设备1100实现本申请实施例中的方法。Figure 11 is a schematic structural diagram of a communication device according to an embodiment of the present application. The communication device 1100 includes a processor 1110, and the processor 1110 can call and run a computer program from the memory, so that the communication device 1100 implements the method in the embodiment of the present application.
在一种可能的实现方式中,通信设备1100还可以包括存储器1120。其中,处理器1110可以从存储器1120中调用并运行计算机程序,以使通信设备1100实现本申请实施例中的方法。In a possible implementation, the communication device 1100 may further include a memory 1120. The processor 1110 can call and run the computer program from the memory 1120, so that the communication device 1100 implements the method in the embodiment of the present application.
其中,存储器1120可以是独立于处理器1110的一个单独的器件,也可以集成在处理器1110中。The memory 1120 may be a separate device independent of the processor 1110, or may be integrated into the processor 1110.
在一种可能的实现方式中,通信设备1100还可以包括收发器1130,处理器1110可以控制该收发器1130与其他设备进行通信,具体地,可以向其他设备发送信息或数据,或接收其他设备发送的信息或数据。In a possible implementation, the communication device 1100 may also include a transceiver 1130, and the processor 1110 may control the transceiver 1130 to communicate with other devices. Specifically, the communication device 1100 may send information or data to, or receive data from, other devices. Information or data sent.
其中,收发器1130可以包括发射机和接收机。收发器1130还可以进一步包括天线,天线的数量可以为一个或多个。Among them, the transceiver 1130 may include a transmitter and a receiver. The transceiver 1130 may further include an antenna, and the number of antennas may be one or more.
在一种可能的实现方式中,该通信设备1100可为本申请实施例的网络设备,并且该通信设备1100可以实现本申请实施例的各个方法中由网络设备实现的相应流程,为了简洁,在此不再赘述。In a possible implementation manner, the communication device 1100 may be a network device according to the embodiment of the present application, and the communication device 1100 may implement the corresponding processes implemented by the network device in each method of the embodiment of the present application. For simplicity, in This will not be described again.
在一种可能的实现方式中,该通信设备1100可为本申请实施例的终端设备,并且该通信设备1100可以实现本申请实施例的各个方法中由终端设备实现的相应流程,为了简洁,在此不再赘述。In a possible implementation manner, the communication device 1100 can be a terminal device in the embodiment of the present application, and the communication device 1100 can implement the corresponding processes implemented by the terminal device in each method of the embodiment of the present application. For simplicity, in This will not be described again.
图12是根据本申请实施例的芯片的示意性结构图。该芯片1200包括处理器1210,处理器1210可以从存储器中调用并运行计算机程序,以实现本申请实施例中的方法。Figure 12 is a schematic structural diagram of a chip according to an embodiment of the present application. The chip 1200 includes a processor 1210, and the processor 1210 can call and run a computer program from the memory to implement the method in the embodiment of the present application.
在一种可能的实现方式中,芯片1200还可以包括存储器1220。其中,处理器1210可以从存储器1220中调用并运行计算机程序,以实现本申请实施例中由终端设备或者网络设备执行的方法。In a possible implementation, the chip 1200 may also include a memory 1220. The processor 1210 can call and run the computer program from the memory 1220 to implement the method executed by the terminal device or network device in the embodiment of the present application.
其中,存储器1220可以是独立于处理器1210的一个单独的器件,也可以集成在处理器1210中。The memory 1220 may be a separate device independent of the processor 1210, or may be integrated into the processor 1210.
在一种可能的实现方式中,该芯片1200还可以包括输入接口1230。其中,处理器710可以控制该输入接口1230与其他设备或芯片进行通信,具体地,可以获取其他设备或芯片发送的信息或数据。In a possible implementation, the chip 1200 may also include an input interface 1230. The processor 710 can control the input interface 1230 to communicate with other devices or chips. Specifically, it can obtain information or data sent by other devices or chips.
在一种可能的实现方式中,该芯片1200还可以包括输出接口1240。其中,处理器1210可以控制该输出接口1240与其他设备或芯片进行通信,具体地,可以向其他设备或芯片输出信息或数据。In a possible implementation, the chip 1200 may also include an output interface 1240. The processor 1210 can control the output interface 1240 to communicate with other devices or chips. Specifically, it can output information or data to other devices or chips.
在一种可能的实现方式中,该芯片可应用于本申请实施例中的网络设备,并且该芯片可以实现本申请实施例的各个方法中由网络设备实现的相应流程,为了简洁,在此不再赘述。In a possible implementation manner, the chip can be applied to the network device in the embodiment of the present application, and the chip can implement the corresponding processes implemented by the network device in each method of the embodiment of the present application. For the sake of brevity, this chip is not mentioned here. Again.
在一种可能的实现方式中,该芯片可应用于本申请实施例中的终端设备,并且该芯片可以实现本申请实施例的各个方法中由终端设备实现的相应流程,为了简洁,在此不再赘述。In a possible implementation manner, the chip can be applied to the terminal device in the embodiment of the present application, and the chip can implement the corresponding processes implemented by the terminal device in the various methods of the embodiment of the present application. For the sake of brevity, this is not mentioned here. Again.
应用于网络设备和终端设备的芯片可以是相同的芯片或不同的芯片。The chips used in network equipment and terminal equipment can be the same chip or different chips.
应理解,本申请实施例提到的芯片还可以称为系统级芯片,系统芯片,芯片系统或片上系统芯片等。It should be understood that the chips mentioned in the embodiments of this application may also be called system-on-chip, system-on-a-chip, system-on-chip or system-on-chip, etc.
上述提及的处理器可以是通用处理器、数字信号处理器(digital signal processor,DSP)、现成可编程门阵列(field programmable gate array,FPGA)、专用集成电路(application specific integrated circuit,ASIC)或者其他可编程逻辑器件、晶体管逻辑器件、分立硬件组件等。其中,上述提到的通用处理器可以是微处理器或者也可以是任何常规的处理器等。The processor mentioned above can be a general-purpose processor, a digital signal processor (DSP), an off-the-shelf programmable gate array (FPGA), an application specific integrated circuit (ASIC), or Other programmable logic devices, transistor logic devices, discrete hardware components, etc. The above-mentioned general processor may be a microprocessor or any conventional processor.
上述提及的存储器可以是易失性存储器或非易失性存储器,或可包括易失性和非易失性存储器两者。其中,非易失性存储器可以是只读存储器(read-only memory,ROM)、可编程只读存储器(programmable ROM,PROM)、可擦除可编程只读存储器(erasable PROM,EPROM)、电可擦除可编程只读存储器(electrically EPROM,EEPROM)或闪存。易失性存储器可以是随机存取存储器(random access memory,RAM)。The memory mentioned above may be volatile memory or non-volatile memory, or may include both volatile and non-volatile memory. Among them, non-volatile memory can be read-only memory (ROM), programmable ROM (PROM), erasable programmable read-only memory (erasable PROM, EPROM), electrically removable memory. Erase electrically programmable read-only memory (EPROM, EEPROM) or flash memory. Volatile memory can be random access memory (RAM).
应理解,上述存储器为示例性但不是限制性说明,例如,本申请实施例中的存储器还可以是静态随机存取存储器(static RAM,SRAM)、动态随机存取存储器(dynamic RAM,DRAM)、同步动态随机存取存储器(synchronous DRAM,SDRAM)、双倍数据速率同步 动态随机存取存储器(double data rate SDRAM,DDR SDRAM)、增强型同步动态随机存取存储器(enhanced SDRAM,ESDRAM)、同步连接动态随机存取存储器(synch link DRAM,SLDRAM)以及直接内存总线随机存取存储器(Direct Rambus RAM,DR RAM)等等。也就是说,本申请实施例中的存储器旨在包括但不限于这些和任意其它适合类型的存储器。It should be understood that the above memory is an exemplary but not restrictive description. For example, the memory in the embodiment of the present application can also be a static random access memory (static RAM, SRAM), a dynamic random access memory (dynamic RAM, DRAM), Synchronous dynamic random access memory (synchronous DRAM, SDRAM), double data rate synchronous dynamic random access memory (double data rate SDRAM, DDR SDRAM), enhanced synchronous dynamic random access memory (enhanced SDRAM, ESDRAM), synchronous connection Dynamic random access memory (synch link DRAM, SLDRAM) and direct memory bus random access memory (Direct Rambus RAM, DR RAM) and so on. That is, memories in embodiments of the present application are intended to include, but are not limited to, these and any other suitable types of memories.
图13是根据本申请实施例的通信系统的示意性框图。该通信系统1300包括终端设备1310和网络设备1320。Figure 13 is a schematic block diagram of a communication system according to an embodiment of the present application. The communication system 1300 includes a terminal device 1310 and a network device 1320.
终端设备1310切换到初始下行DL带宽分段BWP的情况下,确定测量间隔MG的状态,所述MG的状态为激活状态或去激活状态;网络设备1320确定在终端设备切换到初始下行DL带宽分段BWP的情况下测量间隔MG的状态,所述MG的状态为激活状态或去激活状态;When the terminal device 1310 switches to the initial downlink DL bandwidth segment BWP, the status of the measurement interval MG is determined, and the status of the MG is an activated state or a deactivated state; the network device 1320 determines when the terminal device switches to the initial downlink DL bandwidth segment BWP. In the case of segment BWP, the state of the interval MG is measured, and the state of the MG is the activated state or the deactivated state;
或者,终端设备1310切换到休眠带宽分段BWP的情况下,确定测量间隔MG的状态,所述MG的状态为激活状态或去激活状态;网络设备1320确定在终端设备切换到休眠带宽分段BWP的情况下测量间隔MG的状态,所述MG的状态为激活状态或去激活状态。Alternatively, when the terminal device 1310 switches to the dormant bandwidth segment BWP, the status of the measurement interval MG is determined, and the status of the MG is an activated state or a deactivated state; the network device 1320 determines that when the terminal device switches to the dormant bandwidth segment BWP In case of measurement interval, the state of the MG is the activated state or the deactivated state.
其中,该终端设备1310可以用于实现上述方法中由终端设备实现的相应的功能,以及该网络设备1320可以用于实现上述方法中由网络设备实现的相应的功能。为了简洁,在此不再赘述。The terminal device 1310 can be used to implement the corresponding functions implemented by the terminal device in the above method, and the network device 1320 can be used to implement the corresponding functions implemented by the network device in the above method. For the sake of brevity, no further details will be given here.
在上述实施例中,可以全部或部分地通过软件、硬件、固件或者其任意组合来实现。当使用软件实现时,可以全部或部分地以计算机程序产品的形式实现。该计算机程序产品包括一个或多个计算机指令。在计算机上加载和执行该计算机程序指令时,全部或部分地产生按照本申请实施例中的流程或功能。该计算机可以是通用计算机、专用计算机、计算机网络、或者其他可编程装置。该计算机指令可以存储在计算机可读存储介质中,或者从一个计算机可读存储介质向另一个计算机可读存储介质传输,例如,该计算机指令可以从一个网站站点、计算机、服务器或数据中心通过有线(例如同轴电缆、光纤、数字用户线(Digital Subscriber Line,DSL))或无线(例如红外、无线、微波等)方式向另一个网站站点、计算机、服务器或数据中心进行传输。该计算机可读存储介质可以是计算机能够存取的任何可用介质或者是包含一个或多个可用介质集成的服务器、数据中心等数据存储设备。该可用介质可以是磁性介质,(例如,软盘、硬盘、磁带)、光介质(例如,DVD)、或者半导体介质(例如固态硬盘(Solid State Disk,SSD))等。In the above embodiments, it may be implemented in whole or in part by software, hardware, firmware, or any combination thereof. When implemented using software, it may be implemented in whole or in part in the form of a computer program product. The computer program product includes one or more computer instructions. When the computer program instructions are loaded and executed on a computer, the processes or functions according to the embodiments of the present application are generated in whole or in part. The computer may be a general purpose computer, a special purpose computer, a computer network, or other programmable device. The computer instructions may be stored in or transmitted from one computer-readable storage medium to another computer-readable storage medium, for example, the computer instructions may be transmitted over a wired connection from a website, computer, server, or data center (such as coaxial cable, optical fiber, Digital Subscriber Line (DSL)) or wireless (such as infrared, wireless, microwave, etc.) means to transmit to another website, computer, server or data center. The computer-readable storage medium can be any available medium that can be accessed by a computer or a data storage device such as a server or data center integrated with one or more available media. The available media may be magnetic media (eg, floppy disk, hard disk, tape), optical media (eg, DVD), or semiconductor media (eg, Solid State Disk (SSD)), etc.
应理解,在本申请的各种实施例中,上述各过程的序号的大小并不意味着执行顺序的先后,各过程的执行顺序应以其功能和内在逻辑确定,而不应对本申请实施例的实施过程构成任何限定。It should be understood that in the various embodiments of the present application, the size of the sequence numbers of the above-mentioned processes does not mean the order of execution. The execution order of each process should be determined by its functions and internal logic, and should not be used in the embodiments of the present application. The implementation process constitutes any limitation.
所属领域的技术人员可以清楚地了解到,为描述的方便和简洁,上述描述的系统、装置和单元的具体工作过程,可以参考前述方法实施例中的对应过程,在此不再赘述。Those skilled in the art can clearly understand that for the convenience and simplicity of description, the specific working processes of the systems, devices and units described above can be referred to the corresponding processes in the foregoing method embodiments, and will not be described again here.
以上所述仅为本申请的具体实施方式,但本申请的保护范围并不局限于此,任何熟悉本技术领域的技术人员在本申请揭露的技术范围内,可轻易想到变化或替换,都应涵盖在本申请的保护范围之内。因此,本申请的保护范围应以该权利要求的保护范围为准。The above are only specific embodiments of the present application, but the protection scope of the present application is not limited thereto. Any person familiar with the technical field can easily think of changes or replacements within the technical scope disclosed in the present application. are covered by the protection scope of this application. Therefore, the protection scope of this application should be subject to the protection scope of the claims.

Claims (110)

  1. 一种通信方法,包括:A method of communication including:
    终端设备切换到初始下行DL带宽分段BWP的情况下,确定测量间隔MG的状态,所述MG的状态为激活状态或去激活状态。When the terminal device switches to the initial downlink DL bandwidth segment BWP, the state of the measurement interval MG is determined, and the state of the MG is an activated state or a deactivated state.
  2. 根据权利要求1所述的方法,其中,所述MG的状态为基于状态指示信息确定的;其中,所述状态指示信息用于指示所述MG的状态为激活状态或去激活状态。The method according to claim 1, wherein the state of the MG is determined based on state indication information; wherein the state indication information is used to indicate that the state of the MG is an activated state or a deactivated state.
  3. 根据权利要求2所述的方法,还包括:The method of claim 2, further comprising:
    从网络设备接收所述状态指示信息。Receive the status indication information from a network device.
  4. 根据权利要求3所述的方法,其中,所述状态指示信息由系统消息携带。The method according to claim 3, wherein the status indication information is carried by a system message.
  5. 根据权利要求4所述的方法,其中,所述系统消息还包括:所述初始DL BWP的配置信息。The method according to claim 4, wherein the system message further includes: configuration information of the initial DL BWP.
  6. 根据权利要求3所述的方法,其中,所述状态指示信息由无线资源控制RRC信令携带。The method according to claim 3, wherein the status indication information is carried by Radio Resource Control (RRC) signaling.
  7. 根据权利要求6所述的方法,其中,所述状态指示信息由所述RRC信令中的服务小区配置信息携带。The method according to claim 6, wherein the status indication information is carried by serving cell configuration information in the RRC signaling.
  8. 根据权利要求6或7所述的方法,其中,所述状态指示信息由所述RRC信令中的BWP的配置信息携带。The method according to claim 6 or 7, wherein the status indication information is carried by BWP configuration information in the RRC signaling.
  9. 根据权利要求1所述的方法,其中,所述MG的状态为默认的,或者协议规定的。The method according to claim 1, wherein the state of the MG is default or specified by the protocol.
  10. 根据权利要求1至9任一项所述的方法,其中,所述测量间隔MG为预配置测量间隔pre-MG。The method according to any one of claims 1 to 9, wherein the measurement interval MG is a preconfigured measurement interval pre-MG.
  11. 一种通信方法,包括:A method of communication including:
    网络设备确定在终端设备切换到初始下行DL带宽分段BWP的情况下测量间隔MG的状态,所述MG的状态为激活状态或去激活状态。The network device determines the state of the measurement interval MG when the terminal device switches to the initial downlink DL bandwidth segment BWP, and the state of the MG is an activated state or a deactivated state.
  12. 根据权利要求11所述的方法,还包括:The method of claim 11, further comprising:
    所述网络设备发送状态指示信息,其中,所述状态指示信息用于指示所述MG的状态为激活状态或去激活状态。The network device sends status indication information, where the status indication information is used to indicate that the status of the MG is an activation state or a deactivation state.
  13. 根据权利要求12所述的方法,其中,所述状态指示信息由系统消息携带。The method of claim 12, wherein the status indication information is carried by a system message.
  14. 根据权利要求13所述的方法,其中,所述系统消息还包括:所述初始DL BWP的配置信息。The method according to claim 13, wherein the system message further includes: configuration information of the initial DL BWP.
  15. 根据权利要求12所述的方法,其中,所述状态指示信息由无线资源控制RRC信令携带。The method according to claim 12, wherein the status indication information is carried by Radio Resource Control (RRC) signaling.
  16. 根据权利要求15所述的方法,其中,所述状态指示信息由所述RRC信令中的服务小区配置信息携带。The method according to claim 15, wherein the status indication information is carried by serving cell configuration information in the RRC signaling.
  17. 根据权利要求15或16所述的方法,其中,所述状态指示信息由所述RRC信令中的BWP的配置信息携带。The method according to claim 15 or 16, wherein the status indication information is carried by BWP configuration information in the RRC signaling.
  18. 根据权利要求11所述的方法,其中,所述MG的状态为默认的,或者协议规定的。The method according to claim 11, wherein the state of the MG is default or specified by the protocol.
  19. 根据权利要求11至18任一项所述的方法,其中,所述测量间隔MG为预配置测量 间隔pre-MG。The method according to any one of claims 11 to 18, wherein the measurement interval MG is a preconfigured measurement interval pre-MG.
  20. 一种通信方法,包括:A method of communication including:
    终端设备切换到休眠带宽分段BWP的情况下,确定测量间隔MG的状态,所述MG的状态为激活状态或去激活状态。When the terminal device switches to the dormant bandwidth segment BWP, the state of the measurement interval MG is determined, and the state of the MG is an activated state or a deactivated state.
  21. 根据权利要求20所述的方法,其中,所述MG的状态为基于测量对象与目标载波的频域关系确定的。The method according to claim 20, wherein the state of the MG is determined based on the frequency domain relationship between the measurement object and the target carrier.
  22. 根据权利要求21所述的方法,其中,所述MG的状态为基于所述频域关系确定是否需要MG确定的。The method according to claim 21, wherein the status of the MG is determined based on the frequency domain relationship to determine whether an MG is required.
  23. 根据权利要求22所述的方法,其中,所述MG的状态在基于所述频域关系确定需要MG的情况下为激活状态。The method of claim 22, wherein the state of the MG is an active state when it is determined that an MG is required based on the frequency domain relationship.
  24. 根据权利要求22或23所述的方法,其中,所述MG的状态在基于所述频域关系确定不需要MG的情况下为去激活状态。The method according to claim 22 or 23, wherein the state of the MG is a deactivated state when it is determined that the MG is not needed based on the frequency domain relationship.
  25. 根据权利要求21至24任一项所述的方法,其中,所述目标载波为网络设备为所述终端设备配置的载波。The method according to any one of claims 21 to 24, wherein the target carrier is a carrier configured by a network device for the terminal device.
  26. 根据权利要求21至24任一项所述的方法,其中,所述目标载波为网络设备为所述终端设备配置的载波中除所述休眠BWP所对应的载波之外的其他载波。The method according to any one of claims 21 to 24, wherein the target carrier is a carrier other than the carrier corresponding to the dormant BWP among the carriers configured by the network device for the terminal device.
  27. 根据权利要求20所述的方法,其中,所述MG的状态为基于状态指示信息确定的。The method according to claim 20, wherein the status of the MG is determined based on status indication information.
  28. 根据权利要求27所述的方法,还包括:The method of claim 27, further comprising:
    所述终端设备从网络设备接收所述状态指示信息。The terminal device receives the status indication information from a network device.
  29. 根据权利要求27或28所述的方法,其中,所述状态指示信息用于指示所述MG的状态为去激活状态。The method according to claim 27 or 28, wherein the status indication information is used to indicate that the status of the MG is a deactivated status.
  30. 根据权利要求27或28所述的方法,其中,所述状态指示信息为所述休眠BWP对应的载波对应的指示信息,用于指示所述MG的状态为激活状态或去激活状态。The method according to claim 27 or 28, wherein the status indication information is indication information corresponding to the carrier corresponding to the dormant BWP, and is used to indicate that the status of the MG is an activated state or a deactivated state.
  31. 根据权利要求28至30任一项所述的方法,其中,所述状态指示信息由无线资源控制RRC信令携带。The method according to any one of claims 28 to 30, wherein the status indication information is carried by Radio Resource Control (RRC) signaling.
  32. 根据权利要求31所述的方法,其中,所述状态指示信息由所述RRC信令中的BWP的配置信息携带。The method according to claim 31, wherein the status indication information is carried by BWP configuration information in the RRC signaling.
  33. 根据权利要求20所述的方法,其中,所述MG的状态为默认的,或者协议规定的。The method according to claim 20, wherein the state of the MG is default or specified by the protocol.
  34. 根据权利要求33所述的方法,其中,所述MG的状态默认为去激活状态;或者,协议规定为去激活状态。The method according to claim 33, wherein the state of the MG defaults to a deactivated state; or, the protocol stipulates that the state is a deactivated state.
  35. 根据权利要求20至34任一项所述的方法,其中,所述测量间隔MG为预配置测量间隔pre-MG。The method according to any one of claims 20 to 34, wherein the measurement interval MG is a preconfigured measurement interval pre-MG.
  36. 一种通信方法,包括:A method of communication including:
    网络设备确定在终端设备切换到休眠带宽分段BWP的情况下测量间隔MG的状态,所述MG的状态为激活状态或去激活状态。The network device determines the state of the measurement interval MG in the case where the terminal device switches to the dormant bandwidth segment BWP, and the state of the MG is an activated state or a deactivated state.
  37. 根据权利要求36所述的方法,其中,所述MG的状态为基于测量对象与目标载波的频域关系确定的。The method according to claim 36, wherein the state of the MG is determined based on the frequency domain relationship between the measurement object and the target carrier.
  38. 根据权利要求37所述的方法,其中,所述MG的状态为基于所述频域关系确定是否需要MG确定的。The method according to claim 37, wherein the status of the MG is determined based on the frequency domain relationship to determine whether an MG is required.
  39. 根据权利要求38所述的方法,其中,所述MG的状态在基于所述频域关系确定需要MG的情况下为激活状态。The method of claim 38, wherein the state of the MG is an active state when it is determined that an MG is required based on the frequency domain relationship.
  40. 根据权利要求38或39所述的方法,其中,所述MG的状态在基于所述频域关系确定不需要MG的情况下为去激活状态。The method according to claim 38 or 39, wherein the state of the MG is a deactivated state when it is determined that the MG is not needed based on the frequency domain relationship.
  41. 根据权利要求37至40任一项所述的方法,其中,所述目标载波为网络设备为所述终端设备配置的载波。The method according to any one of claims 37 to 40, wherein the target carrier is a carrier configured by a network device for the terminal device.
  42. 根据权利要求37至40任一项所述的方法,其中,所述目标载波为网络设备为所述终端设备配置的载波中除所述休眠BWP所对应的载波之外的其他载波。The method according to any one of claims 37 to 40, wherein the target carrier is a carrier other than the carrier corresponding to the dormant BWP among the carriers configured by the network device for the terminal device.
  43. 根据权利要求36所述的方法,还包括:The method of claim 36, further comprising:
    所述网络设备发送状态指示信息,其中,所述状态指示信息用于指示所述MG的状态为去激活状态。The network device sends status indication information, where the status indication information is used to indicate that the status of the MG is a deactivated state.
  44. 根据权利要求36所述的方法,还包括:The method of claim 36, further comprising:
    所述网络设备发送状态指示信息,其中,所述状态指示信息为所述休眠BWP对应的载波对应的指示信息,用于指示在终端设备切换到休眠BWP的情况下所述MG的状态为激活状态或去激活状态。The network device sends status indication information, where the status indication information is indication information corresponding to the carrier corresponding to the dormant BWP, and is used to indicate that the status of the MG is the active status when the terminal device switches to the dormant BWP. or deactivated state.
  45. 根据权利要求43或44所述的方法,其中,所述状态指示信息由无线资源控制RRC信令携带。The method according to claim 43 or 44, wherein the status indication information is carried by Radio Resource Control (RRC) signaling.
  46. 根据权利要求45所述的方法,其中,所述状态指示信息由所述RRC信令中的BWP的配置信息携带。The method according to claim 45, wherein the status indication information is carried by BWP configuration information in the RRC signaling.
  47. 根据权利要求36所述的方法,其中,所述MG的状态为默认的,或者协议规定的。The method according to claim 36, wherein the state of the MG is default or specified by the protocol.
  48. 根据权利要求47所述的方法,其中,所述MG的状态默认或协议规定为去激活状态。The method according to claim 47, wherein the state of the MG is deactivated by default or specified by protocol.
  49. 根据权利要求36至48任一项所述的方法,其中,所述测量间隔MG为预配置测量间隔pre-MG。The method according to any one of claims 36 to 48, wherein the measurement interval MG is a preconfigured measurement interval pre-MG.
  50. 一种终端设备,包括:A terminal device including:
    第一确定单元,用于切换到初始下行DL带宽分段BWP的情况下,确定测量间隔MG的状态,所述MG的状态为激活状态或去激活状态。The first determination unit is configured to determine the state of the measurement interval MG when switching to the initial downlink DL bandwidth segment BWP, and the state of the MG is an activated state or a deactivated state.
  51. 根据权利要求50所述的设备,其中,所述MG的状态为基于状态指示信息确定的;所述状态指示信息用于指示所述MG的状态为激活状态或去激活状态。The device according to claim 50, wherein the state of the MG is determined based on state indication information; the state indication information is used to indicate that the state of the MG is an activated state or a deactivated state.
  52. 根据权利要求51所述的设备,还包括:The device of claim 51, further comprising:
    第一接收单元,用于从网络设备接收所述状态指示信息。The first receiving unit is configured to receive the status indication information from the network device.
  53. 根据权利要求52所述的设备,其中,所述状态指示信息由系统消息携带。The device of claim 52, wherein the status indication information is carried by a system message.
  54. 根据权利要求53所述的设备,其中,所述系统消息还包括:所述初始DL BWP的配置信息。The device according to claim 53, wherein the system message further includes: configuration information of the initial DL BWP.
  55. 根据权利要求52所述的设备,其中,所述状态指示信息由无线资源控制RRC信令 携带。The device according to claim 52, wherein the status indication information is carried by Radio Resource Control (RRC) signaling.
  56. 根据权利要求55所述的设备,其中,所述状态指示信息由所述RRC信令中的服务小区配置信息携带。The device according to claim 55, wherein the status indication information is carried by serving cell configuration information in the RRC signaling.
  57. 根据权利要求55或56所述的设备,其中,所述状态指示信息由所述RRC信令中的BWP的配置信息携带。The device according to claim 55 or 56, wherein the status indication information is carried by BWP configuration information in the RRC signaling.
  58. 根据权利要求50所述的设备,其中,所述MG的状态为默认的,或者协议规定的。The device according to claim 50, wherein the state of the MG is default or specified by the protocol.
  59. 根据权利要求50至58任一项所述的设备,其中,所述测量间隔MG为预配置测量间隔pre-MG。The device according to any one of claims 50 to 58, wherein the measurement interval MG is a preconfigured measurement interval pre-MG.
  60. 一种网络设备,包括:A network device that includes:
    第二确定单元,用于确定在终端设备切换到初始下行DL带宽分段BWP的情况下测量间隔MG的状态,所述MG的状态为激活状态或去激活状态。The second determination unit is configured to determine the state of the measurement interval MG when the terminal device switches to the initial downlink DL bandwidth segment BWP, and the state of the MG is an activated state or a deactivated state.
  61. 根据权利要求60所述的设备,还包括:The device of claim 60, further comprising:
    第一发送单元,用于发送状态指示信息,其中,所述状态指示信息用于指示所述MG的状态为激活状态或去激活状态。The first sending unit is configured to send status indication information, where the status indication information is used to indicate that the status of the MG is an activation state or a deactivation state.
  62. 根据权利要求61所述的设备,其中,所述状态指示信息由系统消息携带。The device according to claim 61, wherein the status indication information is carried by a system message.
  63. 根据权利要求62所述的设备,其中,所述系统消息还包括:所述初始DL BWP的配置信息。The device according to claim 62, wherein the system message further includes: configuration information of the initial DL BWP.
  64. 根据权利要求61所述的设备,其中,所述状态指示信息由无线资源控制RRC信令携带。The device according to claim 61, wherein the status indication information is carried by Radio Resource Control (RRC) signaling.
  65. 根据权利要求64所述的设备,其中,所述状态指示信息由所述RRC信令中的服务小区配置信息携带。The device according to claim 64, wherein the status indication information is carried by serving cell configuration information in the RRC signaling.
  66. 根据权利要求64或65所述的设备,其中,所述状态指示信息由所述RRC信令中的BWP的配置信息携带。The device according to claim 64 or 65, wherein the status indication information is carried by BWP configuration information in the RRC signaling.
  67. 根据权利要求60所述的设备,其中,所述MG的状态为默认的,或者协议规定的。The device according to claim 60, wherein the state of the MG is default or specified by the protocol.
  68. 根据权利要求60至67任一项所述的设备,其中,所述测量间隔MG为预配置测量间隔pre-MG。The device according to any one of claims 60 to 67, wherein the measurement interval MG is a preconfigured measurement interval pre-MG.
  69. 一种终端设备,包括:A terminal device including:
    第三确定单元,用于切换到休眠带宽分段BWP的情况下,确定测量间隔MG的状态,所述MG的状态为激活状态或去激活状态。The third determination unit is configured to determine the state of the measurement interval MG when switching to the dormant bandwidth segment BWP, and the state of the MG is an activated state or a deactivated state.
  70. 根据权利要求69所述的设备,其中,所述MG的状态为基于测量对象与目标载波的频域关系确定的。The device according to claim 69, wherein the state of the MG is determined based on the frequency domain relationship between the measurement object and the target carrier.
  71. 根据权利要求70所述的设备,其中,所述MG的状态为基于所述频域关系确定是否需要MG确定的。The device according to claim 70, wherein the status of the MG is determined based on the frequency domain relationship to determine whether an MG is required.
  72. 根据权利要求71所述的设备,其中,所述MG的状态在基于所述频域关系确定需要MG的情况下为激活状态。The device of claim 71, wherein the state of the MG is an active state if it is determined that an MG is required based on the frequency domain relationship.
  73. 根据权利要求71或72所述的设备,其中,所述MG的状态在基于所述频域关系确定不需要MG的情况下为去激活状态。The device according to claim 71 or 72, wherein the state of the MG is a deactivated state when it is determined that the MG is not needed based on the frequency domain relationship.
  74. 根据权利要求70至73任一项所述的设备,其中,所述目标载波为网络设备为所述终端设备配置的载波。The device according to any one of claims 70 to 73, wherein the target carrier is a carrier configured by a network device for the terminal device.
  75. 根据权利要求70至73任一项所述的设备,其中,所述目标载波为网络设备为所述终端设备配置的载波中除所述休眠BWP所对应的载波之外的其他载波。The device according to any one of claims 70 to 73, wherein the target carrier is a carrier other than the carrier corresponding to the dormant BWP among the carriers configured by the network device for the terminal device.
  76. 根据权利要求69所述的设备,其中,所述MG的状态为基于状态指示信息确定的。The device according to claim 69, wherein the status of the MG is determined based on status indication information.
  77. 根据权利要求76所述的设备,还包括:The apparatus of claim 76, further comprising:
    第二接收单元,用于从网络设备接收所述状态指示信息。The second receiving unit is configured to receive the status indication information from the network device.
  78. 根据权利要求76或77所述的设备,其中,所述状态指示信息用于指示所述MG的状态为去激活状态。The device according to claim 76 or 77, wherein the status indication information is used to indicate that the status of the MG is a deactivated status.
  79. 根据权利要求76或77所述的设备,其中,所述状态指示信息为所述休眠BWP对应的载波对应的指示信息,用于指示所述MG的状态为激活状态或去激活状态。The device according to claim 76 or 77, wherein the status indication information is indication information corresponding to the carrier corresponding to the dormant BWP, and is used to indicate that the status of the MG is an activated state or a deactivated state.
  80. 根据权利要求77至79任一项所述的设备,其中,所述状态指示信息由无线资源控制RRC信令携带。The device according to any one of claims 77 to 79, wherein the status indication information is carried by Radio Resource Control (RRC) signaling.
  81. 根据权利要求80所述的设备,其中,所述状态指示信息由所述RRC信令中的BWP的配置信息携带。The device according to claim 80, wherein the status indication information is carried by BWP configuration information in the RRC signaling.
  82. 根据权利要求69所述的设备,其中,所述MG的状态为默认的,或者协议规定的。The device according to claim 69, wherein the state of the MG is default or specified by the protocol.
  83. 根据权利要求82所述的设备,其中,所述MG的状态默认或协议规定为去激活状态。The device according to claim 82, wherein the state of the MG is a deactivated state by default or specified by the protocol.
  84. 根据权利要求69至83任一项所述的设备,其中,所述测量间隔MG为预配置测量间隔pre-MG。The device according to any one of claims 69 to 83, wherein the measurement interval MG is a preconfigured measurement interval pre-MG.
  85. 一种网络设备,包括:A network device that includes:
    第四确定单元,用于确定在终端设备切换到休眠带宽分段BWP的情况下测量间隔MG的状态,所述MG的状态为激活状态或去激活状态。The fourth determination unit is used to determine the state of the measurement interval MG when the terminal device switches to the dormant bandwidth segment BWP, and the state of the MG is an activated state or a deactivated state.
  86. 根据权利要求85所述的设备,The device of claim 85,
    其中,所述MG的状态为基于测量对象与目标载波的频域关系确定的。Wherein, the state of the MG is determined based on the frequency domain relationship between the measurement object and the target carrier.
  87. 根据权利要求86所述的设备,The device of claim 86,
    其中,所述MG的状态为基于所述频域关系确定是否需要MG确定的。Wherein, the status of the MG is determined based on the frequency domain relationship to determine whether the MG is required.
  88. 根据权利要求87所述的设备,The device of claim 87,
    其中,所述MG的状态在基于所述频域关系确定需要MG的情况下为激活状态。Wherein, the state of the MG is an active state when it is determined that an MG is required based on the frequency domain relationship.
  89. 根据权利要求87或88所述的设备,其中,所述MG的状态在基于所述频域关系确定不需要MG的情况下为去激活状态。The device according to claim 87 or 88, wherein the state of the MG is a deactivated state when it is determined that the MG is not needed based on the frequency domain relationship.
  90. 根据权利要求86至89任一项所述的设备,其中,所述目标载波为网络设备为所述终端设备配置的载波。The device according to any one of claims 86 to 89, wherein the target carrier is a carrier configured by a network device for the terminal device.
  91. 根据权利要求86至89任一项所述的设备,A device according to any one of claims 86 to 89,
    其中,所述目标载波为网络设备为所述终端设备配置的载波中除所述休眠BWP所对应的载波之外的其他载波。Wherein, the target carrier is a carrier other than the carrier corresponding to the dormant BWP among the carriers configured by the network device for the terminal device.
  92. 根据权利要求85所述的设备,还包括:The apparatus of claim 85, further comprising:
    第二发送单元,用于发送状态指示信息,其中,所述状态指示信息用于指示所述MG的状态为去激活状态。The second sending unit is configured to send status indication information, where the status indication information is used to indicate that the status of the MG is a deactivated state.
  93. 根据权利要求85所述的设备,还包括:The apparatus of claim 85, further comprising:
    第三发送单元,用于发送状态指示信息,其中,所述状态指示信息为所述休眠BWP对应的载波对应的指示信息,用于指示在终端设备切换到休眠BWP的情况下所述MG的状态为激活状态或去激活状态。The third sending unit is configured to send status indication information, where the status indication information is indication information corresponding to the carrier corresponding to the dormant BWP, and is used to indicate the status of the MG when the terminal device switches to the dormant BWP. is activated or deactivated.
  94. 根据权利要求92或93所述的设备,其中,所述状态指示信息由无线资源控制RRC信令携带。The device according to claim 92 or 93, wherein the status indication information is carried by Radio Resource Control (RRC) signaling.
  95. 根据权利要求94所述的设备,其中,所述状态指示信息由所述RRC信令中的BWP的配置信息携带。The device according to claim 94, wherein the status indication information is carried by BWP configuration information in the RRC signaling.
  96. 根据权利要求85所述的设备,其中,所述MG的状态为默认的,或者协议规定的。The device according to claim 85, wherein the state of the MG is default or specified by the protocol.
  97. 根据权利要求96所述的设备,其中,所述MG的状态默认或协议规定为去激活状态。The device according to claim 96, wherein the state of the MG is a deactivated state by default or specified by the protocol.
  98. 根据权利要求85至97任一项所述的设备,其中,所述测量间隔MG为预配置测量间隔pre-MG。The device according to any one of claims 85 to 97, wherein the measurement interval MG is a preconfigured measurement interval pre-MG.
  99. 一种终端设备,包括:处理器、存储器和收发器,该存储器用于存储计算机程序,该处理器用于控制该收发器与其他设备进行通信,该处理器还用于调用并运行所述存储器中存储的计算机程序,以使所述终端设备执行如权利要求1至10中任一项所述的方法,或者,执行如权利要求20至35中任一项所述的方法。A terminal device, including: a processor, a memory and a transceiver. The memory is used to store computer programs. The processor is used to control the transceiver to communicate with other devices. The processor is also used to call and run the memory. A computer program is stored to cause the terminal device to perform the method as described in any one of claims 1 to 10, or to perform the method as described in any one of claims 20 to 35.
  100. 一种网络设备,包括:处理器、存储器和收发器,该存储器用于存储计算机程序,该处理器用于控制该收发器与其他设备进行通信,该处理器还用于调用并运行所述存储器中存储的计算机程序,以使所述网络设备执行如权利要求11至19中任一项所述的方法,或者,执行如权利要求36至49中任一项所述的方法。A network device, including: a processor, a memory and a transceiver. The memory is used to store computer programs. The processor is used to control the transceiver to communicate with other devices. The processor is also used to call and run the memory. A stored computer program to cause the network device to execute the method as claimed in any one of claims 11 to 19, or to execute the method as claimed in any one of claims 36 to 49.
  101. 一种芯片,包括:处理器,用于从存储器中调用并运行计算机程序,使得安装有所述芯片的设备执行如权利要求1至10中任一项所述的方法,或者,执行如权利要求20至35中任一项所述的方法。A chip, comprising: a processor, configured to call and run a computer program from a memory, so that a device installed with the chip executes the method as claimed in any one of claims 1 to 10, or executes the method as claimed in any one of claims 1 to 10 The method of any one of 20 to 35.
  102. 一种芯片,包括:处理器,用于从存储器中调用并运行计算机程序,使得安装有所述芯片的设备执行如权利要求11至19中任一项所述的方法,或者,执行如权利要求36至49中任一项所述的方法。A chip, including: a processor, configured to call and run a computer program from a memory, so that a device installed with the chip executes the method as claimed in any one of claims 11 to 19, or executes the method as claimed in any one of claims 11 to 19 The method of any one of 36 to 49.
  103. 一种计算机可读存储介质,用于存储计算机程序,当所述计算机程序被设备运行时使得所述设备执行如权利要求1至10中任一项所述的方法,或者,执行如权利要求20至35中任一项所述的方法。A computer-readable storage medium for storing a computer program, which when the computer program is run by a device, causes the device to perform the method as claimed in any one of claims 1 to 10, or to perform the method as claimed in claim 20 The method described in any one of to 35.
  104. 一种计算机可读存储介质,用于存储计算机程序,当所述计算机程序被设备运行时使得所述设备执行如权利要求11至19中任一项所述的方法,或者,执行如权利要求20至35中任一项所述的方法。A computer-readable storage medium for storing a computer program, which when the computer program is run by a device, causes the device to perform the method as claimed in any one of claims 11 to 19, or to perform the method as claimed in claim 20 The method described in any one of to 35.
  105. 一种计算机程序产品,包括计算机程序指令,该计算机程序指令使得计算机执行如权利要求1至10中任一项所述的方法,或者,执行如权利要求20至35中任一项所述 的方法。A computer program product, comprising computer program instructions, the computer program instructions causing a computer to perform the method according to any one of claims 1 to 10, or to perform the method according to any one of claims 20 to 35 .
  106. 一种计算机程序产品,包括计算机程序指令,该计算机程序指令使得计算机执行如权利要求11至19中任一项所述的方法,或者,执行如权利要求36至49中任一项所述的方法。A computer program product, comprising computer program instructions, the computer program instructions causing a computer to perform the method according to any one of claims 11 to 19, or to perform the method according to any one of claims 36 to 49 .
  107. 一种计算机程序,所述计算机程序使得计算机执行如权利要求1至10中任一项所述的方法,或者,执行如权利要求20至35中任一项所述的方法。A computer program that causes a computer to perform the method as described in any one of claims 1 to 10, or to perform the method as described in any one of claims 20 to 35.
  108. 一种计算机程序,所述计算机程序使得计算机执行如权利要求11至19中任一项所述的方法,或者,执行如权利要求36至49中任一项所述的方法。A computer program that causes a computer to perform the method as described in any one of claims 11 to 19, or to perform the method as described in any one of claims 36 to 49.
  109. 一种通信系统,包括:A communications system including:
    终端设备,用于执行如权利要求1至10中任一项所述的方法;Terminal equipment, used to perform the method according to any one of claims 1 to 10;
    网络设备,用于执行如权利要求11至19中任一项所述的方法。Network equipment, used to perform the method according to any one of claims 11 to 19.
  110. 一种通信系统,包括:A communications system including:
    终端设备,用于执行如权利要求20至35中任一项所述的方法;Terminal equipment, used to perform the method according to any one of claims 20 to 35;
    网络设备,用于执行如权利要求36至49中任一项所述的方法。Network equipment, used to perform the method according to any one of claims 36 to 49.
PCT/CN2022/087497 2022-04-18 2022-04-18 Communication method, terminal device, and network device WO2023201489A1 (en)

Priority Applications (1)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
PCT/CN2022/087497 WO2023201489A1 (en) 2022-04-18 2022-04-18 Communication method, terminal device, and network device

Applications Claiming Priority (1)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
PCT/CN2022/087497 WO2023201489A1 (en) 2022-04-18 2022-04-18 Communication method, terminal device, and network device

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2023201489A1 true WO2023201489A1 (en) 2023-10-26

Family

ID=88418909

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/CN2022/087497 WO2023201489A1 (en) 2022-04-18 2022-04-18 Communication method, terminal device, and network device

Country Status (1)

Country Link
WO (1) WO2023201489A1 (en)

Citations (5)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN109803304A (en) * 2017-11-16 2019-05-24 维沃移动通信有限公司 Measure the indicating means and equipment at interval
US20190274146A1 (en) * 2018-05-14 2019-09-05 Intel Corporation Mechanism on measurement gap based inter-frequency measurement
CN110445565A (en) * 2018-05-04 2019-11-12 中国移动通信有限公司研究院 Broadband switching method, user terminal and network side equipment
WO2021129612A1 (en) * 2019-12-25 2021-07-01 夏普株式会社 Method executed by user equipment and user equipment
US20220052828A1 (en) * 2018-09-17 2022-02-17 Apple Inc. Techniques in Measurement Gap (MG) Configurations with Bandwidth Part (BWP)

Patent Citations (5)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN109803304A (en) * 2017-11-16 2019-05-24 维沃移动通信有限公司 Measure the indicating means and equipment at interval
CN110445565A (en) * 2018-05-04 2019-11-12 中国移动通信有限公司研究院 Broadband switching method, user terminal and network side equipment
US20190274146A1 (en) * 2018-05-14 2019-09-05 Intel Corporation Mechanism on measurement gap based inter-frequency measurement
US20220052828A1 (en) * 2018-09-17 2022-02-17 Apple Inc. Techniques in Measurement Gap (MG) Configurations with Bandwidth Part (BWP)
WO2021129612A1 (en) * 2019-12-25 2021-07-01 夏普株式会社 Method executed by user equipment and user equipment

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
US11626947B2 (en) Communication method and communications device
US9854464B2 (en) Method of avoiding IDC interference in a wireless communication system and apparatus for same
US10045191B2 (en) Method for use in device-to-device communication, wireless communication system, and architecture
WO2018028325A1 (en) Data transmission method and apparatus
WO2019029333A1 (en) Resource scheduling method and apparatus
EP3911047A2 (en) Service area for time synchronization
US20230179374A1 (en) Channel transmission method, terminal device, and network device
WO2018028272A1 (en) Uplink resource scheduling method and corresponding device
WO2022027488A1 (en) Wireless communication method, terminal device, and network device
WO2023030514A1 (en) Wireless communication method and communication apparatus
US20230199709A1 (en) Information processing method, terminal device, and network device
TW201922037A (en) Signaling for improving multicarrier utilization
WO2021189367A1 (en) Physical channel monitoring method and terminal device
US20230354118A1 (en) Wireless communication method, terminal device and network device
WO2020248143A1 (en) Power control method, terminal device and network device
WO2023201489A1 (en) Communication method, terminal device, and network device
JP7394856B2 (en) Terminal device, base station device, and wireless communication method
WO2019192451A1 (en) Communication method and communication apparatus
WO2023202547A1 (en) Communication method, apparatus and computer readable storage medium
WO2024031479A1 (en) Wireless communication method, user equipment and network device
WO2023141760A1 (en) Wireless communication method, terminal device and network device
WO2024061030A1 (en) Communication method and communication apparatus
WO2023141872A1 (en) Wireless communication method, terminal device, and network device
WO2023197260A1 (en) Wireless communication method, terminal device, and network device
WO2024065806A1 (en) Wireless communication method, and terminal device and network device

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 22937728

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1